وَمَن
Appears 177 times in Quran
Occurrences in Quran
Found 50 verses containing "وَمَن".
أَمْ تُرِيدُونَ أَن تَسْـَٔلُوا۟ رَسُولَكُمْ كَمَا سُئِلَ مُوسَىٰ مِن قَبْلُ ۗ وَمَن يَتَبَدَّلِ ٱلْكُفْرَ بِٱلْإِيمَٰنِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ سَوَآءَ ٱلسَّبِيلِ
4:154.
اس جگہ ’’سمجھو کہ‘‘ کے الفاظ فَقَدْ کا ترجمہ ہے۔ فَاء اپنے بعد ایک محذوف پر دلالت کرتا ہے جو ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
4:154.
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the spirit of stupid questioning, so that the dignity of faith should suffer and they may fall victim to doubts.
4:154.
Important Words:
سواء (right) is derived from سوی. They say سوی الرجل i.e. his affairs became straight and well. سواء means: (1) the central portion of a thing; (2) equal. سواء السبیل means, the straight or right portion of a way; or a straight or right way (Lisan & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the same spirit of stupid questioning, so that their hearts might gradually become estranged from the dignity of faith and give way to doubt. In warning Muslims against such a course, the Quran points out that the Jews had ruined themselves by putting similar questions to Moses, and that the Muslims should, therefore, beware of following their evil example. In fact, unnecessary and irrelevant questions in religious matters eventually lead one to loss of faith, for they tend to degrade religion to a plaything or a piece of idle philosophy.
As to the nature of questions put to Moses by the Israelites, the Quran refers to one in 4:154. Says God: The People of the Book ask thee to cause a Book to descend on them from heaven. They asked Moses a greater thing than this; they said, 'Show us Allah openly.' then a destructive punishment overtook them because of their transgression. Then they took the calf for worship after clear Signs had come to them, but We pardoned even that. And We gave Moses manifest authority. This verse gives us an indication as to the nature of the questions that were put to Moses, and Muslims are forbidden to put such questions to their Prophet.
c
4:154.
1
اس جگہ ’’سمجھو کہ‘‘ کے الفاظ فَقَدْ کا ترجمہ ہے۔ فَاء اپنے بعد ایک محذوف پر دلالت کرتا ہے جو ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
b
4:154.
115
Important Words:
سواء (right) is derived from سوی. They say سوی الرجل i.e. his affairs became straight and well. سواء means: (1) the central portion of a thing; (2) equal. سواء السبیل means, the straight or right portion of a way; or a straight or right way (Lisan & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the same spirit of stupid questioning, so that their hearts might gradually become estranged from the dignity of faith and give way to doubt. In warning Muslims against such a course, the Quran points out that the Jews had ruined themselves by putting similar questions to Moses, and that the Muslims should, therefore, beware of following their evil example. In fact, unnecessary and irrelevant questions in religious matters eventually lead one to loss of faith, for they tend to degrade religion to a plaything or a piece of idle philosophy.
As to the nature of questions put to Moses by the Israelites, the Quran refers to one in 4:154. Says God: The People of the Book ask thee to cause a Book to descend on them from heaven. They asked Moses a greater thing than this; they said, 'Show us Allah openly.' then a destructive punishment overtook them because of their transgression. Then they took the calf for worship after clear Signs had come to them, but We pardoned even that. And We gave Moses manifest authority. This verse gives us an indication as to the nature of the questions that were put to Moses, and Muslims are forbidden to put such questions to their Prophet.
b
4:154.
133
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the spirit of stupid questioning, so that the dignity of faith should suffer and they may fall victim to doubts.
ٱلَّذِينَ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُمُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ يَتْلُونَهُۥ حَقَّ تِلَاوَتِهِۦٓ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يُؤْمِنُونَ بِهِۦ ۗ وَمَن يَكْفُرْ بِهِۦ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْخَٰسِرُونَ
3:114.
اَلَّذِیْنَ اٰتَیْنَاھُمُ الْکِتٰبَ میں اَلْکِتَابَ سے مراد قرآن کریم ہے اور اس آیت میں اللہ تعالیٰ نے یہود کو ملزم قرار دیا ہے کہ تم نے تو تورات کو پسِ پشت پھینک رکھا تھا۔ مگر اب یہ لوگ جن کو ہم نے قرآن کریم دیا ہے اس پر پوری طرح عمل کرتے ہیں اور اس پر ان کا رسمی ایمان نہیں۔ بلکہ پختہ ایمان ہے۔ (تفصیل کے لئے دیکھیں تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم صفحہ ۱۴۹)۔
3:114.
The words refer to Muslims and not to Jews and Christians, because it is the Muslims who are the true and sincere followers of the Qur’an and not the Jews or the Christians who refused to believe in it and rejected it as a piece of fabrication (Qatadah). This meaning of Yatluna is supported by Ibn-e- ‘Abbas, ‘Abdullah bin Mas‘ud, ‘Ata, and ‘Ikrimah.
3:114.
Commentary:
The words, they to whom We have given the Book, clearly refer here to Muslims and not to Jews and Christians, because it is the Muslims that were the true and sincere followers of the Quran and not Jews and Christians who refused to believe in the Quran and rejected it as a piece of fabrication. Jews and Christians have been referred to in the concluding portion of the verse where, owing to their rejection of the Quran, they are spoken of as the losers. The verse provides very high and well-merited praise for the Companions of the Holy Prophet who have been described as true followers of God’s guidance.
f
3:114.
1
اَلَّذِیْنَ اٰتَیْنَاھُمُ الْکِتٰبَ میں اَلْکِتَابَ سے مراد قرآن کریم ہے اور اس آیت میں اللہ تعالیٰ نے یہود کو ملزم قرار دیا ہے کہ تم نے تو تورات کو پسِ پشت پھینک رکھا تھا۔ مگر اب یہ لوگ جن کو ہم نے قرآن کریم دیا ہے اس پر پوری طرح عمل کرتے ہیں اور اس پر ان کا رسمی ایمان نہیں۔ بلکہ پختہ ایمان ہے۔ (تفصیل کے لئے دیکھیں تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم صفحہ ۱۴۹)۔
a
3:114.
128
Commentary:
The words, they to whom We have given the Book, clearly refer here to Muslims and not to Jews and Christians, because it is the Muslims that were the true and sincere followers of the Quran and not Jews and Christians who refused to believe in the Quran and rejected it as a piece of fabrication. Jews and Christians have been referred to in the concluding portion of the verse where, owing to their rejection of the Quran, they are spoken of as the losers. The verse provides very high and well-merited praise for the Companions of the Holy Prophet who have been described as true followers of God’s guidance.
b
3:114.
142
The words refer to Muslims and not to Jews and Christians, because it is the Muslims who are the true and sincere followers of the Qur’an and not the Jews or the Christians who refused to believe in it and rejected it as a piece of fabrication (Qatadah). This meaning of Yatluna is supported by Ibn-e- ‘Abbas, ‘Abdullah bin Mas‘ud, ‘Ata, and ‘Ikrimah.
وَإِذْ قَالَ إِبْرَٰهِۦمُ رَبِّ ٱجْعَلْ هَٰذَا بَلَدًا ءَامِنًا وَٱرْزُقْ أَهْلَهُۥ مِنَ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ مَنْ ءَامَنَ مِنْهُم بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۖ قَالَ وَمَن كَفَرَ فَأُمَتِّعُهُۥ قَلِيلًا ثُمَّ أَضْطَرُّهُۥٓ إِلَىٰ عَذَابِ ٱلنَّارِ ۖ وَبِئْسَ ٱلْمَصِيرُ
3:98; 14:36; 27:92; 28:58.
3:98; 14:36; 27:92; 28:58.
3:98; 14:36; 27:92: 28:58; 29:68; 106:5.
Important Words:
مصیر (destination) is derived from صار meaning, he returned, or he became. مصیر is thus a place or condition to which a person or thing comes or returns; a destination (Aqrab).
Commentary:
When Abraham offered the prayer, there was no town existing near the Ka‘bah. There existed only the House of God. So Abraham prayed that in that wildest of wildernesses there might grow up a town, and that that town might become a place of security, affording peace to mankind. In fulfilment of this prayer, there grew up the town of Mecca which has remained a place of peace and security for thousands of years. The prayer also implied that the Baitullah, would be the means of bringing peace and security to mankind. This was destined to come about in two ways: Firstly, those who accepted and followed Islam were to become secure from all evils and to become recipients of God’s blessings. Secondly, Islam was to be the means of bringing about peace and concord among the different nations of the world.
While praying to God to grant sustenance to the dwellers of Mecca, Abraham restricted his prayer only to its good and righteous dwellers. The reason for this was that when Abraham had previously prayed to God to raise Reformers and Religious Leaders from his progeny, God had replied that such men would be raised from among the righteous only (2:125). So when he prayed a second time to God to grant sustenance to the people of Mecca, he was more careful and confined his prayer to the righteous only. This shows how submissive and careful God’s Prophets are. But Abraham had now evidently become overly cautious, for this time God answered, saying, that He would grant sustenance to all men, irrespective of whether they were righteous or not, because He was the Provider for the whole universe, not for the righteous only. The wicked, however, shall be duly punished for their crimes.
Another reason why Abraham restricted his prayer to the righteous was that he wished Mecca to be the abode of the righteous alone; but God knew that even that sacred town was not going to remain untarnished throughout the long centuries of history.
a
3:98; 14:36; 27:92; 28:58.
a
3:98; 14:36; 27:92: 28:58; 29:68; 106:5.
133
Important Words:
مصیر (destination) is derived from صار meaning, he returned, or he became. مصیر is thus a place or condition to which a person or thing comes or returns; a destination (Aqrab).
Commentary:
When Abraham offered the prayer, there was no town existing near the Ka‘bah. There existed only the House of God. So Abraham prayed that in that wildest of wildernesses there might grow up a town, and that that town might become a place of security, affording peace to mankind. In fulfilment of this prayer, there grew up the town of Mecca which has remained a place of peace and security for thousands of years. The prayer also implied that the Baitullah, would be the means of bringing peace and security to mankind. This was destined to come about in two ways: Firstly, those who accepted and followed Islam were to become secure from all evils and to become recipients of God’s blessings. Secondly, Islam was to be the means of bringing about peace and concord among the different nations of the world.
While praying to God to grant sustenance to the dwellers of Mecca, Abraham restricted his prayer only to its good and righteous dwellers. The reason for this was that when Abraham had previously prayed to God to raise Reformers and Religious Leaders from his progeny, God had replied that such men would be raised from among the righteous only (2:125). So when he prayed a second time to God to grant sustenance to the people of Mecca, he was more careful and confined his prayer to the righteous only. This shows how submissive and careful God’s Prophets are. But Abraham had now evidently become overly cautious, for this time God answered, saying, that He would grant sustenance to all men, irrespective of whether they were righteous or not, because He was the Provider for the whole universe, not for the righteous only. The wicked, however, shall be duly punished for their crimes.
Another reason why Abraham restricted his prayer to the righteous was that he wished Mecca to be the abode of the righteous alone; but God knew that even that sacred town was not going to remain untarnished throughout the long centuries of history.
b
3:98; 14:36; 27:92; 28:58.
وَمَن يَرْغَبُ عَن مِّلَّةِ إِبْرَٰهِۦمَ إِلَّا مَن سَفِهَ نَفْسَهُۥ ۚ وَلَقَدِ ٱصْطَفَيْنَٰهُ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا ۖ وَإِنَّهُۥ فِى ٱلْءَاخِرَةِ لَمِنَ ٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ
سَفِہَ نَفْسَہٗ کے معنے ہیں اَھْلَکَ نَفْسَہٗ وَاَوْبَقَھَا (لسان العرب) یعنی اپنے نفس کو ہلاک کر دیا۔
3:96; 4:126; 6:162.
2:125; 3:34; 16:121, 122; 60:5.
The different forms of the word Safiha, Safaha and Safuha give different meanings, Safiha meaning, he was ignorant or foolish or light-witted. When the word is used with Nafsa-hu as its seeming object as in this verse, it does not actually become transitive but simply looks so (Lisan & Mufradat). The words also mean: "Who has ruined his soul."
3:96; 4:126; 6:162.
2:125; 3:34; 16:121, 122; 60:5.
Important Words:
یرغب (will turn away) is derived from رغب which is used either with the preposition فی or عن giving different meanings. رغب فیه means, he sought or desired it; and رغب عنه means, he turned away from it or he left or loathed it ( Aqrab).
سفه نفسه (is foolish of mind). The word سفه is used in three different forms: سفه (1) (safiha), (2) (safaha), and (3) (safuha). All these give different meanings. The Quran uses the first form, i.e. سفه (safiha) which means, he was ignorant or he behaved ignorantly; he was foolish or he acted foolishly; he was lightwitted or he behaved light-wittedly. When the word سفه is used with نفسه as its seeming object as in the verse under comment, it does not actually become transitive but simply looks so (as does the verb خسر which see under 2:28). In fact, as most lexicographers have explained, the expression سفه نفسهis really either سفه فی نفسه or سفه ھو نفسا or سفھت نفسه and means, either he is foolish of mind, or he is foolish himself, or his mind acts foolishly (Aqrab, Mufradat, Lisan & Lane).
اصطفیناه (him did We choose) is derived from صفا which means, it became pure and clean. اصفاه بکذا means, he chose him for that, or he honoured him with that. اصطفاه means, he chose or selected him from among others; he chose him in preference to others (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The attention of Jews and Christians is drawn to the point that when it has been proved that, in accordance with the prayer of Abraham, a Prophet was to appear from among the children of Ishmael and that Prophet has actually appeared, it is incumbent upon them to ponder over his claims and not to belie the prayer of Abraham and go against their own religion. The verse emphasizes the fact that anybody who departs from the way of the great patriarch of the People of the Book betrays his own folly. The religion of Abraham leads to salvation, whereas defection from it leads to ruin and deprivation.
a
3:96; 4:126; 6:162.
b
2:125; 3:34; 16:121, 122; 60:5.
3
سَفِہَ نَفْسَہٗ کے معنے ہیں اَھْلَکَ نَفْسَہٗ وَاَوْبَقَھَا (لسان العرب) یعنی اپنے نفس کو ہلاک کر دیا۔
a
3:96; 4:126; 6:162.
b
2:125; 3:34; 16:121, 122; 60:5.
137
Important Words:
یرغب (will turn away) is derived from رغب which is used either with the preposition فی or عن giving different meanings. رغب فیه means, he sought or desired it; and رغب عنه means, he turned away from it or he left or loathed it ( Aqrab).
سفه نفسه (is foolish of mind). The word سفه is used in three different forms: سفه (1) (safiha), (2) (safaha), and (3) (safuha). All these give different meanings. The Quran uses the first form, i.e. سفه (safiha) which means, he was ignorant or he behaved ignorantly; he was foolish or he acted foolishly; he was lightwitted or he behaved light-wittedly. When the word سفه is used with نفسه as its seeming object as in the verse under comment, it does not actually become transitive but simply looks so (as does the verb خسر which see under 2:28). In fact, as most lexicographers have explained, the expression سفه نفسهis really either سفه فی نفسه or سفه ھو نفسا or سفھت نفسه and means, either he is foolish of mind, or he is foolish himself, or his mind acts foolishly (Aqrab, Mufradat, Lisan & Lane).
اصطفیناه (him did We choose) is derived from صفا which means, it became pure and clean. اصفاه بکذا means, he chose him for that, or he honoured him with that. اصطفاه means, he chose or selected him from among others; he chose him in preference to others (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The attention of Jews and Christians is drawn to the point that when it has been proved that, in accordance with the prayer of Abraham, a Prophet was to appear from among the children of Ishmael and that Prophet has actually appeared, it is incumbent upon them to ponder over his claims and not to belie the prayer of Abraham and go against their own religion. The verse emphasizes the fact that anybody who departs from the way of the great patriarch of the People of the Book betrays his own folly. The religion of Abraham leads to salvation, whereas defection from it leads to ruin and deprivation.
a
3:96; 4:126; 6:162.
b
2:125; 3:34; 16:121, 122; 60:5.
148
The different forms of the word Safiha, Safaha and Safuha give different meanings, Safiha meaning, he was ignorant or foolish or light-witted. When the word is used with Nafsa-hu as its seeming object as in this verse, it does not actually become transitive but simply looks so (Lisan & Mufradat). The words also mean: "Who has ruined his soul."
۞ إِنَّ ٱلصَّفَا وَٱلْمَرْوَةَ مِن شَعَآئِرِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَمَنْ حَجَّ ٱلْبَيْتَ أَوِ ٱعْتَمَرَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِ أَن يَطَّوَّفَ بِهِمَا ۚ وَمَن تَطَوَّعَ خَيْرًا فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَاكِرٌ عَلِيمٌ
22:33.
صفا اور مروہ مکہ میں دو پہاڑیاں ہیں۔
بِھِمَاکے معنے یہاں فِیْھِمَاکے ہیں‘ یعنی ان دونوں پہاڑیوں کے درمیان اِدھر سے اُدھر اُن قواعد کے مطابق جو سنت سے ثابت ہیں دوڑے۔
مدینہ کے لوگ صفا اور مروۃ کے درمیان سعی کرنے کو گناہ سمجھتے تھے (تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم ص ۳۰۷)۔
22:33.
As-Safa and Al-Marwah are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. These hills stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special care of her and her son, Ishmael, on the other. A visit to these hills deeply impresses the pilgrim with the love, fidelity to and power, of God.
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to Hajj (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on every Muslim once in a life-time, but to ‘Umrah (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but only supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the obligatory one.
22:33.
Important Words:
الصفا والمروة (As-Safa and Al-Marwah) are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. Both Arabian history and the traditions of Islam connect these hills with the story of Hagar and Ishmael when Abraham left them near these hills under God’s command. Ishmael was yet a child, and when the scanty provisions ran out and he was in a pitiable condition for want of water, Hagar anxiously and repeatedly ran between these two hills in search of water and help, but none was found. When, however, she was in her seventh circuit, an angel of God called to her saying that God had brought forth a spring of water near her son and that she should go and look to it (Bukhari, ch. on Anbiya’). Thus the hills of صفا (Safa) and مروة (Marwah) became شعائر الله i.e. Signs of God worthy of due honour and respect in the sight of every true believer. The Bible also makes mention of مروة in a somewhat changed form (Gen. 22:2; also Enc. Bib. under Moriah) in connection with the sacrifice of Abraham’s son.
شعائر (Signs) is the plural of شعیرة which is derived from شعر meaning, he knew or he perceived. Thus شعیرة means: (1) anything by means of which another thing may be known; (2) a sign; (3) anything which is considered or is performed as a mark of submission to God; (4) the rites of pilgrimage and practices pertaining thereto (Aqrab).
حج (is on pilgrimage) means: (1) he sought a person or thing; (2) he went or repaired to a person or thing; (3) he went to a person again and again; (4) he visited a holy place; (5) he performed حج (Pilgrimage) to the Ka‘bah; (6) he overpowered a person in argument (Aqrab).
اعتمر (performs ‘Umrah) is derived from عمر which means, he occupied or tenanted a house; he worshipped God and prayed to Him. اعتمر means, he went to, or visited, a place. عمرة means, visiting a place; worshipping and praying to God; performing Lesser Pilgrimage in which some of the rites of حج are left out (Aqrab).
تطوع (does beyond what is obligatory) is derived from طاع i.e. he obeyed; he did an act willingly and voluntarily. The infinitive الطوع means: (1) obedience; (2) doing an act willingly without its being obligatory on one. تطوع means, he performed an act with effort and volition. تطوع خیرا means, he performed a good act which was not obligatory on him (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
To a superficial observer the verse under comment dealing with the subject of Pilgrimage appears to have no connection with the preceding ones which deal with the subject of trials and sacrifices. But a deeper study will at once disclose a very close connection between the two. The preceding verses warned Muslims to be prepared for sacrifices and gave them the glad tidings that if they performed the required sacrifices willingly and patiently, God would bless them greatly and would show special mercy to them and would remember them with kindness and would provide guidance for them whenever needed. Now, in order to bring home to them the truth of this promise, He invites the attention of Muslims to the great sacrifice of Abraham near the site of As-Safa and Al-Marwah. Abraham obeyed His Lord and left his wife Hagar and his son Ishmael near these two hills of Mecca, which was then a most desolate tract. The seed was sown in a soil which was apparently the most barren of all soils, but how wonderfully it prospered! God was a most Loving and Faithful God who so fondly remembered His servants, Abraham and Ishmael, even after the lapse of 2,500 years, and Muslims can expect the same love and the same fidelity from Him, if they too love and obey Him. Safa and Marwah, as explained under Important Words above, are two hills which stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special treatment of her and her son on the other. A visit to these hills makes the pilgrim deeply impressed with the love, fidelity and power of God.
The words, it is no sin for him, should not be taken to mean that performing the circuit between Safa and Marwah is only permissible and not obligatory. The expression is used simply to remove the aversion to such performance found among certain persons on the basis of the fact that heathen Arabs had placed two idols on these two hills (Muslim). God removed this erroneous notion by saying that it was no sin to perform the circuit between Safa and Marwah, which on account of the great sacrifice of Abraham, Hagar and Ishmael on the one hand and the resulting blessings of God on the other, had become شعائر الله i.e. great Signs of God. That the performance of these circuits is obligatory in both حج and عمرة(the Greater and the Lesser Pilgrimage) is clear from the practice of the Holy Prophet and his injunctions to his followers (Bukhari, ch. Al-Hajj).
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to حج (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on each Muslim once in a lifetime, but to عمرة (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but simply supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional حج or Pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the one obligatory Pilgrimage.
As this verse mentions the subject of Pilgrimage only secondarily, we are not giving here a note on the rites and philosophy of which will be discussed when we come to the relevant verses.
e
22:33.
1
صفا اور مروہ مکہ میں دو پہاڑیاں ہیں۔
2
بِھِمَاکے معنے یہاں فِیْھِمَاکے ہیں‘ یعنی ان دونوں پہاڑیوں کے درمیان اِدھر سے اُدھر اُن قواعد کے مطابق جو سنت سے ثابت ہیں دوڑے۔
3
مدینہ کے لوگ صفا اور مروۃ کے درمیان سعی کرنے کو گناہ سمجھتے تھے (تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم ص ۳۰۷)۔
a
22:33.
165
Important Words:
الصفا والمروة (As-Safa and Al-Marwah) are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. Both Arabian history and the traditions of Islam connect these hills with the story of Hagar and Ishmael when Abraham left them near these hills under God’s command. Ishmael was yet a child, and when the scanty provisions ran out and he was in a pitiable condition for want of water, Hagar anxiously and repeatedly ran between these two hills in search of water and help, but none was found. When, however, she was in her seventh circuit, an angel of God called to her saying that God had brought forth a spring of water near her son and that she should go and look to it (Bukhari, ch. on Anbiya’). Thus the hills of صفا (Safa) and مروة (Marwah) became شعائر الله i.e. Signs of God worthy of due honour and respect in the sight of every true believer. The Bible also makes mention of مروة in a somewhat changed form (Gen. 22:2; also Enc. Bib. under Moriah) in connection with the sacrifice of Abraham’s son.
شعائر (Signs) is the plural of شعیرة which is derived from شعر meaning, he knew or he perceived. Thus شعیرة means: (1) anything by means of which another thing may be known; (2) a sign; (3) anything which is considered or is performed as a mark of submission to God; (4) the rites of pilgrimage and practices pertaining thereto (Aqrab).
حج (is on pilgrimage) means: (1) he sought a person or thing; (2) he went or repaired to a person or thing; (3) he went to a person again and again; (4) he visited a holy place; (5) he performed حج (Pilgrimage) to the Ka‘bah; (6) he overpowered a person in argument (Aqrab).
اعتمر (performs ‘Umrah) is derived from عمر which means, he occupied or tenanted a house; he worshipped God and prayed to Him. اعتمر means, he went to, or visited, a place. عمرة means, visiting a place; worshipping and praying to God; performing Lesser Pilgrimage in which some of the rites of حج are left out (Aqrab).
تطوع (does beyond what is obligatory) is derived from طاع i.e. he obeyed; he did an act willingly and voluntarily. The infinitive الطوع means: (1) obedience; (2) doing an act willingly without its being obligatory on one. تطوع means, he performed an act with effort and volition. تطوع خیرا means, he performed a good act which was not obligatory on him (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
To a superficial observer the verse under comment dealing with the subject of Pilgrimage appears to have no connection with the preceding ones which deal with the subject of trials and sacrifices. But a deeper study will at once disclose a very close connection between the two. The preceding verses warned Muslims to be prepared for sacrifices and gave them the glad tidings that if they performed the required sacrifices willingly and patiently, God would bless them greatly and would show special mercy to them and would remember them with kindness and would provide guidance for them whenever needed. Now, in order to bring home to them the truth of this promise, He invites the attention of Muslims to the great sacrifice of Abraham near the site of As-Safa and Al-Marwah. Abraham obeyed His Lord and left his wife Hagar and his son Ishmael near these two hills of Mecca, which was then a most desolate tract. The seed was sown in a soil which was apparently the most barren of all soils, but how wonderfully it prospered! God was a most Loving and Faithful God who so fondly remembered His servants, Abraham and Ishmael, even after the lapse of 2,500 years, and Muslims can expect the same love and the same fidelity from Him, if they too love and obey Him. Safa and Marwah, as explained under Important Words above, are two hills which stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special treatment of her and her son on the other. A visit to these hills makes the pilgrim deeply impressed with the love, fidelity and power of God.
The words, it is no sin for him, should not be taken to mean that performing the circuit between Safa and Marwah is only permissible and not obligatory. The expression is used simply to remove the aversion to such performance found among certain persons on the basis of the fact that heathen Arabs had placed two idols on these two hills (Muslim). God removed this erroneous notion by saying that it was no sin to perform the circuit between Safa and Marwah, which on account of the great sacrifice of Abraham, Hagar and Ishmael on the one hand and the resulting blessings of God on the other, had become شعائر الله i.e. great Signs of God. That the performance of these circuits is obligatory in both حج and عمرة(the Greater and the Lesser Pilgrimage) is clear from the practice of the Holy Prophet and his injunctions to his followers (Bukhari, ch. Al-Hajj).
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to حج (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on each Muslim once in a lifetime, but to عمرة (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but simply supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional حج or Pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the one obligatory Pilgrimage.
As this verse mentions the subject of Pilgrimage only secondarily, we are not giving here a note on the rites and philosophy of which will be discussed when we come to the relevant verses.
a
22:33.
184
As-Safa and Al-Marwah are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. These hills stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special care of her and her son, Ishmael, on the other. A visit to these hills deeply impresses the pilgrim with the love, fidelity to and power, of God.
185
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to Hajj (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on every Muslim once in a life-time, but to ‘Umrah (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but only supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the obligatory one.
شَهْرُ رَمَضَانَ ٱلَّذِىٓ أُنزِلَ فِيهِ ٱلْقُرْءَانُ هُدًى لِّلنَّاسِ وَبَيِّنَٰتٍ مِّنَ ٱلْهُدَىٰ وَٱلْفُرْقَانِ ۚ فَمَن شَهِدَ مِنكُمُ ٱلشَّهْرَ فَلْيَصُمْهُ ۖ وَمَن كَانَ مَرِيضًا أَوْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ فَعِدَّةٌ مِّنْ أَيَّامٍ أُخَرَ ۗ يُرِيدُ ٱللَّهُ بِكُمُ ٱلْيُسْرَ وَلَا يُرِيدُ بِكُمُ ٱلْعُسْرَ وَلِتُكْمِلُوا۟ ٱلْعِدَّةَ وَلِتُكَبِّرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ عَلَىٰ مَا هَدَىٰكُمْ وَلَعَلَّكُمْ تَشْكُرُونَ
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
22:38.
رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月) 是太阴年的第九个月。此词源出 رَمَضَ (Ramada)。他们说 رَمَضَ الصَّائِمُ (Ramadas-Sai’mu) 就是说, 斋戒人内部由于斋戒变得热而口渴得很 (Lane)。这一月份之所以这祥命名是因为 (一) 在这个月中的斋戒由于口渴而产生热和如火的情况; (二) 在这个月中的礼拜使藏在人的内心的罪恶的痕迹焚毁 {عَسَاكِرْ (‘Asakir) 和 مَرْدَوَيْه (Mardawaih)}; 以及 (三) 因为他在这个月中的祈祷在人的心中产生对他的造物主和他的同类爱的必要的温暖。رَمَضَان 这名称起源于伊斯兰教, 这个月从前的名称是 نَاطِقْ (Natiq) (قَدِيْر, Qadir)。
اَلْقُرْاٰن (Al-Qur’an, «古兰») 源出 قَرَأ (Qara’a) 意指, 他诵读; 他传达或送递一项消息; 他搜集东西。因此 اَلْقُرْاٰن 指的是: (一) 要读的一本书。«古兰经» 是世界上最广泛阅读的书 (Enc. Brit); (2) 要向全世界传达和传送的一本书或一项消息。«古兰经» 是其教义绝对无限制的唯一经典; 因为所有其他的经典是针对特定的时代和特定的民族的, 而 «古兰经» 是针对一切时代和一切民族的 (34:29); (3) 一本包含一切真理的书; «古兰经» 的确是一个知识宝库, 它不仅包含了先前经典中所含有的一切永恒真理 (98:4), 而且也包含了人类在任何时候及任何情况下都可能需要的一切真理 (18:50)。
正是在 رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月, 太阴年的第九月) 的二十四日, 穆圣接到他的第一次启示 (جَرِيْر, Jarir); 而这全部启示在每年这月都由吉布里尔天使背诵给穆圣听。这一惯例延续到这位先知一生的最后一年, 这年全部 «古兰经» 由天使长吉布里尔在这一月中向他背诵了两遍 (布哈理), 因此从一方面来讲, 甚至可以说全部 «古兰经» 是在斋月 (太阳年的第九月) 中下降的。
这句并非不必要的重复, 因为在前节经文中它构成了要为斋戒下令准备场地的经节的一部分, 而在本节经文中它成了实际命令的一部分。可是, «古兰经» 明智地没有详细说明 “生病” 和 “旅行” 这两个术语, 而让它们由人们的通常习惯和当时情况来规定。
بَیِّنٰتٍ مِّنَ الْھُدٰی سے مراد یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں فلاسفر اور ہئیت دان بھی دلیلیں دیتے ہیں مگر ان کے نتیجہ میں یا تو وہ گمراہیوں کو سچا ثابت کرتے ہیں اور یا پھر دنیوی باتیں پیش کرتے ہیں‘ مگر قرآن کریم ایسی دلیلوں پر مشتمل ہے جو ہدایت کا رنگ رکھتی ہیں۔ بے مطلب اور بے غرض باتیں نہیں ہوتیں۔
یعنی دائمی مریض نہ ہو۔ یا مثل دائمی مریض کے نہ ہو۔
یعنی جب وہ تندرست ہو۔ یہ حکم بیمار کے لئے نہیں۔ سفر میں ہو اور دائمی مریض بھی نہ ہو تو اس پر اور دنوں میں تعداد پوری کرنی واجب ہے۔
وَ لِتُکْمِلُوا الْعِدَّۃَ کا عطف پہلے کسی جملہ سے نہیں ملتا اس لئے محققین نے اس جگہ عربی قواعد کے مطابق واؤ کے بعد ایک جملہ محذوف قرار دیا ہے اس جملہ کا ترجمہ خطوط کے اندر کیا گیا ہے (دیکھئیے’’اِمْـلَاءُ مَا مَنَّ بِہِ الرَّحْمٰن)‘‘
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
22:38.
Ramadan is the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from Ramada. They say Ramadas-Sa’imu, i.e. the inside of the man fasting became very hot with thirst owing to fasting (Lane). The month is so named because (1) fasting in this month produces heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship in this month burns away the traces of sin in man (‘Asakir & Mardawaih); and (3) because his devotions in this month produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow-beings. The name Ramadan is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being Natiq (Qadir).
Al-Qur’an is derived from Qara’a which means, he read; he conveyed or delivered a message; he collected the thing. Thus Qur’an means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Qur’an is the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit.); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to the world. The Qur’an is the only revealed Book whose Message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other revealed Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Qur’an is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29); (3) a book which comprises all truths; the Qur’an is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which comprises not only all eternal truths contained in the previous revealed Books (98:4), but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50).
It was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Jarir); and the whole revelation was rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet by the angel Gabriel in this month. This practice continued till the very last year of the Prophet’s life when the whole of the Qur’an was rehearsed to him twice by the Archangel Jibril in this month (Bukhari). Thus in a way even the whole of the Qur’an may be said to have been revealed in the month of Ramadan.
The sentence is not an unnecessary repetition; for whereas in the previous verse it formed part of the verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The Qur’an, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people and the attending circumstances.
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
22:38.
Important Words:
رمضان (Ramadan) is the name given to the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from the verb رمض. They say رمض النھار i.e. the day became intensely hot. رمض الرجل means, the man had his feet burnt by the earth which had become intensely heated by the sun. رمض الصائم means, his inside became very hot with thirst owing to fasting. ارتمض من الحزن means, he began to burn, i.e. he was greatly distressed, with grief and sorrow. الرمض means, the first rain of autumn which finds the earth hot and burning (Aqrab & Lane). The month of رمضان is so named because (1) fasting in this month causes heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship and devotion in this month burns away the traces of sin in man, this signification being corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet (‘Asakir and Merdawaih as quoted by Fathul-Qadir); and (3) its devotions produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow beings. The name رمضان is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being ناتق (Muhit & Mawardi, as quoted by Fathul-Qadir).
القرآن (the Quran) is the name given by God Himself to the Book revealed to the Holy Prophet of Islam, containing the final Law for mankind. The word is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الکتاب meaning: (1) he read the book, i.e. he read it to himself; or (2) he recited the book, i.e. he read it aloud so that others might hear it; قرأ also means, he conveyed or delivered a message, etc., as they say اقرأعلیه السلام meaning, convey or deliver my salam to him; (3) قرأ الشیء means, he collected or drew together the thing; (4) قرأت المراة means, the woman became pregnant and brought forth a child (Aqrab & Lane). Thus قرآن (Quran) means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Quran is indeed the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit. 11th edition, article on Koran by Nöldeke); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to other peoples. The Quran is indeed the only revealed Book whose delivery or message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Quran is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29; also Bukhari); (3) a Book which comprises and has collected in itself all truth; the Quran is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which not only comprises all eternal truths revealed in previous Books (98:4) but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50); (4) a Book which contains not only visible truth which may be seen and felt by all but, like a pregnant woman big with child, it contains truths that lie hidden from the eyes of most men and, like a newborn child, come to light only as and when time ripens (15:22). All these meanings are not only expressive of an existing state of affairs but also serve as mighty prophecies, the truth of which has been established in all ages.
Commentary:
The ground having been suitably prepared in the preceding two verses, this verse gives the awaited commandment about fasting. But even here the actual commandment is preceded by a suitable description of the month of Ramadan in which fasts were to be observed. The month was not chosen arbitrarily but was selected for the purpose of fasting because it was a sacred month in which the Quran was revealed. And the Quran is not an ordinary book. It is a Book full of right guidance and of bright Signs and of things that help to differentiate between truth and falsehood. This sublime foreword placed before the commandment about fasting contains an implied question to the effect: Will you not now fast when fasting is a tried thing, when it is so useful, when it is to be observed only for a few days, when even in these few days suitable facilities have been provided, and lastly when these few days correspond with a month which is full of blessings?
As hinted above, this verse mentions the reason for which the month of Ramadan was selected for the purpose of fasting. It was in this month that the Quran was revealed. The revelation of the Quran in the month of Ramadan may mean two things: (1) that the revelation of the Holy Book commenced in the month of Ramadan, for it is on record that it was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Musnad & Jarir); (2) that the revelation of the Quran was repeated to the Holy Prophet every year in the month of Ramadan, for it is also on record that the angel Gabriel rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet the whole of the revealed portion of the Quran during this month and this he continued to do till the very year of the Prophet’s death (Bukhari, ch. on Manaqib). Thus in a way even the whole of the Quran may be said to have been sent down in Ramadan.
The words, clear proofs of guidance and discrimination, point out that the Quran is a Book which is not content with making mere assertions. It supports every assertion it makes with necessary reasons and arguments which are both clear and convincing, and it also adduces heavenly Signs which go to discriminate right from wrong with such clearness that they leave no room for doubt. This excellence belongs exclusively to the Quran. Indeed, other scriptures, too have been spoken of as "a light and guidance," but about none of them has it been said that they supply reasons, arguments and Signs in support of their assertions.
Although former Prophets also were given Signs that people might accept them as Divine Messengers, yet the Scriptures they brought contained nothing that might bear testimony to their truth. It is only the Quran that contains all kinds of evidence—rational, scriptural and heavenly—to demonstrate the truth of its teachings so that it might itself furnish necessary evidence of its truth, and that, unlike other scriptures, tales and stories of the past might not form its sole support.
The clause, let him fast therein, signifies that it is necessary to fast all the days of the month of Ramadan; it will not do to fast only for a few days. Thus, out of every twelve months in the year, at least one—that of Ramadan—must be so devoted to the worship of God.
The clause, whoso is sick or is on a journey, he shall fast the same number of other days, at first appears to be an unnecessary repetition of what has already been said in the preceding verse in identical words, but really it is not so; for whereas in the previous verse this clause formed part of a verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The clause signifies that if in the month of Ramadan one happens to be sick or is on a journey, one should not fast, owing to the extra hardship entailed, but should fast the same number of other days when one has recovered from sickness or when the journey is over. The Quran, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people.
The clause, He desires not hardship for you, points to the very important principle that divine commands are not meant to cause trouble or inconvenience but to afford ease and facility. In this connection it may well be noted that St. Paul looks upon the Law as an entanglement with "the yoke of bondage" if not as an actual curse (Gal. chs. 3 & 5). But he forgets that true freedom, and for that matter, true happiness lie only in willing obedience to a good and righteous legislation. The Islamic law, even "in meats and drinks and divers washings, and carnal ordinances," is a real help and guidance rather than a hindrance and a bondage.
The clause, so that you may complete the number, indicates that God’s purpose in prescribing a fixed number of days is that believers may be able to complete the number which, in His sight, is essential for their spiritual welfare. A fixed number was essential; for, otherwise, some people might have failed to fast even the minimum number, while others would have unduly suffered for doubt as to their having completed the necessary number even after they had long exceeded it.
The clause, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you, points to yet another object underlying the commandment. All such expressions in which the offering of a particular praise to God is enjoined signify two things: (1) that man being God’s creation should continuously offer praise to Him, invoking the particular divine attribute that may suit the occasion; (2) that he should also try to reflect in his person the selfsame attribute of God. "Exalting God" would therefore mean not only God’s glorification but the uplift and exaltation of the devotee himself. In fact God stands in need of no praise. He is what He is whether we praise Him or not. So truly speaking, everything is for the benefit of man himself, and the benefit underlying fasting is the exaltation of man, morally and spiritually and, in a sense, physically as well.
The final clause, that you may be grateful, is also full of deep meaning. God is not cruel or unkind; He has due regard for our weaknesses and He does not put us to unnecessary trouble; and whatever seeming trouble He puts us to is for our own good. This kind and loving attitude of God towards us ought to give rise to a corresponding feeling of love for Him in our hearts and we ought to feel grateful to Him for His love and kindness.
To a superficial observer the language of the Quran as used in this verse might appear to be rather unconnected, forming independent clauses. But a closer study reveals a beautiful arrangement between them. In fact the four clauses in the concluding portion of this verse furnish reasons for the four commandments contained in the first portion of the verse, the succeeding reasons following the reversed order of the preceding commandments in a most natural manner. The first reason given by the verse is contained in the clause, Allah desires to give you facility and He desires not hardship for you. Though the apparent wording of this clause is different from the wordings of the succeeding clauses, actually it is also one of those that supply a reason, for in reality the clause stands like this, "that you be afforded facility, etc." Corresponding to this clause we have the last commandment of the verse, i.e. whoso is sick or is on a journey, etc. The second clause supplying a reason is, that you may complete the number, corresponding to which we have the commandment, whosoever of you is present at home in this month, let him fast therein, hinting that God means the Muslims to fast the whole month. The third clause supplying a reason is, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you. Corresponding to this we have the words, a guidance for mankind, etc. Finally comes the clause, that you may be grateful, corresponding to which we have the clause, the month of Ramadan is that in which the Quran was sent down, hinting that the wise God has chosen the most sacred and the most blessed part of the year for fasting so that you may be doubly benefited by it. Such figure of speech in which parts of a sentence correspond with others occurring in the same sentence in a reverse order, the first clause of the former group corresponding with the last clause of the latter, is known in Arabic rhetoric as لف و نشر معکوس (Mutawwal).
a
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
c
22:38.
119
رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月) 是太阴年的第九个月。此词源出 رَمَضَ (Ramada)。他们说 رَمَضَ الصَّائِمُ (Ramadas-Sai’mu) 就是说, 斋戒人内部由于斋戒变得热而口渴得很 (Lane)。这一月份之所以这祥命名是因为 (一) 在这个月中的斋戒由于口渴而产生热和如火的情况; (二) 在这个月中的礼拜使藏在人的内心的罪恶的痕迹焚毁 {عَسَاكِرْ (‘Asakir) 和 مَرْدَوَيْه (Mardawaih)}; 以及 (三) 因为他在这个月中的祈祷在人的心中产生对他的造物主和他的同类爱的必要的温暖。رَمَضَان 这名称起源于伊斯兰教, 这个月从前的名称是 نَاطِقْ (Natiq) (قَدِيْر, Qadir)。
120
اَلْقُرْاٰن (Al-Qur’an, «古兰») 源出 قَرَأ (Qara’a) 意指, 他诵读; 他传达或送递一项消息; 他搜集东西。因此 اَلْقُرْاٰن 指的是: (一) 要读的一本书。«古兰经» 是世界上最广泛阅读的书 (Enc. Brit); (2) 要向全世界传达和传送的一本书或一项消息。«古兰经» 是其教义绝对无限制的唯一经典; 因为所有其他的经典是针对特定的时代和特定的民族的, 而 «古兰经» 是针对一切时代和一切民族的 (34:29); (3) 一本包含一切真理的书; «古兰经» 的确是一个知识宝库, 它不仅包含了先前经典中所含有的一切永恒真理 (98:4), 而且也包含了人类在任何时候及任何情况下都可能需要的一切真理 (18:50)。
121
正是在 رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月, 太阴年的第九月) 的二十四日, 穆圣接到他的第一次启示 (جَرِيْر, Jarir); 而这全部启示在每年这月都由吉布里尔天使背诵给穆圣听。这一惯例延续到这位先知一生的最后一年, 这年全部 «古兰经» 由天使长吉布里尔在这一月中向他背诵了两遍 (布哈理), 因此从一方面来讲, 甚至可以说全部 «古兰经» 是在斋月 (太阳年的第九月) 中下降的。
122
这句并非不必要的重复, 因为在前节经文中它构成了要为斋戒下令准备场地的经节的一部分, 而在本节经文中它成了实际命令的一部分。可是, «古兰经» 明智地没有详细说明 “生病” 和 “旅行” 这两个术语, 而让它们由人们的通常习惯和当时情况来规定。
1
بَیِّنٰتٍ مِّنَ الْھُدٰی سے مراد یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں فلاسفر اور ہئیت دان بھی دلیلیں دیتے ہیں مگر ان کے نتیجہ میں یا تو وہ گمراہیوں کو سچا ثابت کرتے ہیں اور یا پھر دنیوی باتیں پیش کرتے ہیں‘ مگر قرآن کریم ایسی دلیلوں پر مشتمل ہے جو ہدایت کا رنگ رکھتی ہیں۔ بے مطلب اور بے غرض باتیں نہیں ہوتیں۔
2
یعنی دائمی مریض نہ ہو۔ یا مثل دائمی مریض کے نہ ہو۔
3
یعنی جب وہ تندرست ہو۔ یہ حکم بیمار کے لئے نہیں۔ سفر میں ہو اور دائمی مریض بھی نہ ہو تو اس پر اور دنوں میں تعداد پوری کرنی واجب ہے۔
4
وَ لِتُکْمِلُوا الْعِدَّۃَ کا عطف پہلے کسی جملہ سے نہیں ملتا اس لئے محققین نے اس جگہ عربی قواعد کے مطابق واؤ کے بعد ایک جملہ محذوف قرار دیا ہے اس جملہ کا ترجمہ خطوط کے اندر کیا گیا ہے (دیکھئیے’’اِمْـلَاءُ مَا مَنَّ بِہِ الرَّحْمٰن)‘‘
a
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
c
22:38.
192
Important Words:
رمضان (Ramadan) is the name given to the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from the verb رمض. They say رمض النھار i.e. the day became intensely hot. رمض الرجل means, the man had his feet burnt by the earth which had become intensely heated by the sun. رمض الصائم means, his inside became very hot with thirst owing to fasting. ارتمض من الحزن means, he began to burn, i.e. he was greatly distressed, with grief and sorrow. الرمض means, the first rain of autumn which finds the earth hot and burning (Aqrab & Lane). The month of رمضان is so named because (1) fasting in this month causes heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship and devotion in this month burns away the traces of sin in man, this signification being corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet (‘Asakir and Merdawaih as quoted by Fathul-Qadir); and (3) its devotions produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow beings. The name رمضان is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being ناتق (Muhit & Mawardi, as quoted by Fathul-Qadir).
القرآن (the Quran) is the name given by God Himself to the Book revealed to the Holy Prophet of Islam, containing the final Law for mankind. The word is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الکتاب meaning: (1) he read the book, i.e. he read it to himself; or (2) he recited the book, i.e. he read it aloud so that others might hear it; قرأ also means, he conveyed or delivered a message, etc., as they say اقرأعلیه السلام meaning, convey or deliver my salam to him; (3) قرأ الشیء means, he collected or drew together the thing; (4) قرأت المراة means, the woman became pregnant and brought forth a child (Aqrab & Lane). Thus قرآن (Quran) means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Quran is indeed the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit. 11th edition, article on Koran by Nöldeke); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to other peoples. The Quran is indeed the only revealed Book whose delivery or message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Quran is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29; also Bukhari); (3) a Book which comprises and has collected in itself all truth; the Quran is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which not only comprises all eternal truths revealed in previous Books (98:4) but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50); (4) a Book which contains not only visible truth which may be seen and felt by all but, like a pregnant woman big with child, it contains truths that lie hidden from the eyes of most men and, like a newborn child, come to light only as and when time ripens (15:22). All these meanings are not only expressive of an existing state of affairs but also serve as mighty prophecies, the truth of which has been established in all ages.
Commentary:
The ground having been suitably prepared in the preceding two verses, this verse gives the awaited commandment about fasting. But even here the actual commandment is preceded by a suitable description of the month of Ramadan in which fasts were to be observed. The month was not chosen arbitrarily but was selected for the purpose of fasting because it was a sacred month in which the Quran was revealed. And the Quran is not an ordinary book. It is a Book full of right guidance and of bright Signs and of things that help to differentiate between truth and falsehood. This sublime foreword placed before the commandment about fasting contains an implied question to the effect: Will you not now fast when fasting is a tried thing, when it is so useful, when it is to be observed only for a few days, when even in these few days suitable facilities have been provided, and lastly when these few days correspond with a month which is full of blessings?
As hinted above, this verse mentions the reason for which the month of Ramadan was selected for the purpose of fasting. It was in this month that the Quran was revealed. The revelation of the Quran in the month of Ramadan may mean two things: (1) that the revelation of the Holy Book commenced in the month of Ramadan, for it is on record that it was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Musnad & Jarir); (2) that the revelation of the Quran was repeated to the Holy Prophet every year in the month of Ramadan, for it is also on record that the angel Gabriel rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet the whole of the revealed portion of the Quran during this month and this he continued to do till the very year of the Prophet’s death (Bukhari, ch. on Manaqib). Thus in a way even the whole of the Quran may be said to have been sent down in Ramadan.
The words, clear proofs of guidance and discrimination, point out that the Quran is a Book which is not content with making mere assertions. It supports every assertion it makes with necessary reasons and arguments which are both clear and convincing, and it also adduces heavenly Signs which go to discriminate right from wrong with such clearness that they leave no room for doubt. This excellence belongs exclusively to the Quran. Indeed, other scriptures, too have been spoken of as "a light and guidance," but about none of them has it been said that they supply reasons, arguments and Signs in support of their assertions.
Although former Prophets also were given Signs that people might accept them as Divine Messengers, yet the Scriptures they brought contained nothing that might bear testimony to their truth. It is only the Quran that contains all kinds of evidence—rational, scriptural and heavenly—to demonstrate the truth of its teachings so that it might itself furnish necessary evidence of its truth, and that, unlike other scriptures, tales and stories of the past might not form its sole support.
The clause, let him fast therein, signifies that it is necessary to fast all the days of the month of Ramadan; it will not do to fast only for a few days. Thus, out of every twelve months in the year, at least one—that of Ramadan—must be so devoted to the worship of God.
The clause, whoso is sick or is on a journey, he shall fast the same number of other days, at first appears to be an unnecessary repetition of what has already been said in the preceding verse in identical words, but really it is not so; for whereas in the previous verse this clause formed part of a verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The clause signifies that if in the month of Ramadan one happens to be sick or is on a journey, one should not fast, owing to the extra hardship entailed, but should fast the same number of other days when one has recovered from sickness or when the journey is over. The Quran, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people.
The clause, He desires not hardship for you, points to the very important principle that divine commands are not meant to cause trouble or inconvenience but to afford ease and facility. In this connection it may well be noted that St. Paul looks upon the Law as an entanglement with "the yoke of bondage" if not as an actual curse (Gal. chs. 3 & 5). But he forgets that true freedom, and for that matter, true happiness lie only in willing obedience to a good and righteous legislation. The Islamic law, even "in meats and drinks and divers washings, and carnal ordinances," is a real help and guidance rather than a hindrance and a bondage.
The clause, so that you may complete the number, indicates that God’s purpose in prescribing a fixed number of days is that believers may be able to complete the number which, in His sight, is essential for their spiritual welfare. A fixed number was essential; for, otherwise, some people might have failed to fast even the minimum number, while others would have unduly suffered for doubt as to their having completed the necessary number even after they had long exceeded it.
The clause, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you, points to yet another object underlying the commandment. All such expressions in which the offering of a particular praise to God is enjoined signify two things: (1) that man being God’s creation should continuously offer praise to Him, invoking the particular divine attribute that may suit the occasion; (2) that he should also try to reflect in his person the selfsame attribute of God. "Exalting God" would therefore mean not only God’s glorification but the uplift and exaltation of the devotee himself. In fact God stands in need of no praise. He is what He is whether we praise Him or not. So truly speaking, everything is for the benefit of man himself, and the benefit underlying fasting is the exaltation of man, morally and spiritually and, in a sense, physically as well.
The final clause, that you may be grateful, is also full of deep meaning. God is not cruel or unkind; He has due regard for our weaknesses and He does not put us to unnecessary trouble; and whatever seeming trouble He puts us to is for our own good. This kind and loving attitude of God towards us ought to give rise to a corresponding feeling of love for Him in our hearts and we ought to feel grateful to Him for His love and kindness.
To a superficial observer the language of the Quran as used in this verse might appear to be rather unconnected, forming independent clauses. But a closer study reveals a beautiful arrangement between them. In fact the four clauses in the concluding portion of this verse furnish reasons for the four commandments contained in the first portion of the verse, the succeeding reasons following the reversed order of the preceding commandments in a most natural manner. The first reason given by the verse is contained in the clause, Allah desires to give you facility and He desires not hardship for you. Though the apparent wording of this clause is different from the wordings of the succeeding clauses, actually it is also one of those that supply a reason, for in reality the clause stands like this, "that you be afforded facility, etc." Corresponding to this clause we have the last commandment of the verse, i.e. whoso is sick or is on a journey, etc. The second clause supplying a reason is, that you may complete the number, corresponding to which we have the commandment, whosoever of you is present at home in this month, let him fast therein, hinting that God means the Muslims to fast the whole month. The third clause supplying a reason is, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you. Corresponding to this we have the words, a guidance for mankind, etc. Finally comes the clause, that you may be grateful, corresponding to which we have the clause, the month of Ramadan is that in which the Quran was sent down, hinting that the wise God has chosen the most sacred and the most blessed part of the year for fasting so that you may be doubly benefited by it. Such figure of speech in which parts of a sentence correspond with others occurring in the same sentence in a reverse order, the first clause of the former group corresponding with the last clause of the latter, is known in Arabic rhetoric as لف و نشر معکوس (Mutawwal).
a
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
c
22:38.
207A
Ramadan is the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from Ramada. They say Ramadas-Sa’imu, i.e. the inside of the man fasting became very hot with thirst owing to fasting (Lane). The month is so named because (1) fasting in this month produces heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship in this month burns away the traces of sin in man (‘Asakir & Mardawaih); and (3) because his devotions in this month produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow-beings. The name Ramadan is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being Natiq (Qadir).
207B
Al-Qur’an is derived from Qara’a which means, he read; he conveyed or delivered a message; he collected the thing. Thus Qur’an means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Qur’an is the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit.); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to the world. The Qur’an is the only revealed Book whose Message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other revealed Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Qur’an is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29); (3) a book which comprises all truths; the Qur’an is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which comprises not only all eternal truths contained in the previous revealed Books (98:4), but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50).
208
It was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Jarir); and the whole revelation was rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet by the angel Gabriel in this month. This practice continued till the very last year of the Prophet’s life when the whole of the Qur’an was rehearsed to him twice by the Archangel Jibril in this month (Bukhari). Thus in a way even the whole of the Qur’an may be said to have been revealed in the month of Ramadan.
209
The sentence is not an unnecessary repetition; for whereas in the previous verse it formed part of the verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The Qur’an, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people and the attending circumstances.
۞ وَٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ فِىٓ أَيَّامٍ مَّعْدُودَٰتٍ ۚ فَمَن تَعَجَّلَ فِى يَوْمَيْنِ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ وَمَن تَأَخَّرَ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ ۚ لِمَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ ۗ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّكُمْ إِلَيْهِ تُحْشَرُونَ
2:153.
这固定的日子是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 11, 12和13号, 在此期间朝觐者被要求尽可能逗留在米纳, 并在赞扬安拉的情况中度过他们的时光。那些日子被称为 اَيَّامُ التَّشْرِيْق (Ayyamut-Tashriq) 即光辉和美丽的日子。
朝觐的根本目的是达到 (敬畏), 这就是 «古兰经» 在2:198节中关于朝觐的训谕开头所用的词句。由此强调, 仅仅是某些仪式的表面奉行是无意义的, 除非它们伴之以应作为人类一切行为基础的敬畏精神。
在朝觐中起着重要作用的各种不同的事物与地方在 «古兰经» 中被认为是 شَعَائِرُالله (Sha‘a’i-rullah) (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) 即安拉的迹象, 这意味着安拉计划只把它们作为象征致使它们内在的意义铭刻在朝觐者心灵上。无数的朝觐者环绕着天房巡回, 所有穆斯林在就地礼拜时, 所朝向的天房, 使他们心中想起安拉的独一和庄严。它还提醒他们关于人类的统一。在萨法和马尔瓦之间奔跑的这一举动促使朝觐者在心中想起了这充满怜悯的哈贾尔 (夏甲) 和伊司马仪 (以实玛利) 的经历, 提醒他们, 安拉是如何为忠实的信者提供支持的, 即使他们在辽阔荒原的孤苦中无所依靠。مِنٰی (Mina) 源出 اُمْنِيَّة (Umniyyah--------一个目的或欲望)--------提醒朝觐者, 他应带着会遇安拉的 “目的” 或 “欲望” 去那里。含意为神圣的象征的马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆暗示最后的阶段即在眼前。阿腊法特使他想起他已经到了实现的阶段, 而受戒使他想起复活日。朝觐者只穿两块未缝合的布, 犹如死尸的裹尸布, 一块遮蔽上身, 一块遮蔽下身; 他还依然光着头呢。这种情况使他想起, 似乎他已经死而复活。朝觐者集合在呈现着复活日景象的阿腊法特--------人们突然从他们的白色裹尸布中复活了, 并集合在他们的养主面前。奉献的牲畜令人想起伊布拉欣以他儿子伊司马仪为牺牲, 而这牺牲以象征性的语言体现了一条教训, 人类为了安拉的道路应随时准备不仅牺牲他自身, 而且牺牲他的财富、产业、甚至他的子孙。
مُزدَلفہ سے واپس لوٹنے کے بعد منٰی میں تین دن رہنے کا حکم ہے مگر اجازت ہے کہ کوئی شخص دو دن کے بعد بھی لَوٹ آئے۔ اس جگہ اسی کا ذکر ہے۔ یہ ضروری نہیں کہ اگر تین دن رہے تو پھر چوتھا دن بھی اس کو رہنا پڑے گا‘ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ صرف دو دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے اور تیسرے دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے۔
See 2:153.
These are the 11th, 12th and 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in glorifying God. They are called Ayyamut-Tashriq, i.e. the days of brightness and beauty.
The underlying object of the Pilgrimage is the attainment of Taqwa (righteousness), the very word with which the Qur’an began its commandments about Hajj in 2:198, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is meaningless unless they are accompanied by the spirit of righteousness which should underlie all actions of man.
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Qur’an as Sha‘a’irullah (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which signifies that they are intended to serve only as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance. The Ka‘bah, round which thousands of pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which all Muslims turn while offering their Prayers wherever they may happen to be, recalls to their minds Divine Unity and the Majesty of God. It also reminds them of the unity of mankind. The act of running between Safa and Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the story, full of pathos, of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for His helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness. Mina, derived from Umniyyah (an object or a desire), reminds the pilgrim that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. Mash‘arul-Haram meaning, the sacred symbol, hints that the final stage
See 2:153.
Commentary:
The glorification of God, or the celebration of His praises enjoined in the preceding verses is to be particularly observed in the appointed number of days to be spent in Mina after the Hajj is over. These are the 11th, the 12th and the 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in God’s glorification. In these days they are also required, as a symbol of the driving out of Satan, to cast pebbles daily at the three pillars so long as they stay there. These are called ایام التشریق i.e. the days of beauty and brightness.
The clause, whoso hastens to leave in two days, refers to the stay in Mina. If a pilgrim leaves Mina two days earlier or stays behind for two days more, no sin shall attach to him, provided everything he does is done with good intention, acting righteously and God-fearingly.
The verse ends with the clause, and fear Allah and know that you shall be brought together before Him, to bring home to the reader or the pilgrim that the underlying object of the Pilgrimage is تقوی, the very word with which the Quran began its commandments about Hajj in 2:197, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is nothing unless they are accompanied by تقوی or the spirit of righteousness which must underlie all actions of man.
The clause, واعلموا انکم الیه تحشرون translated above as, know that you shall all be brought together before Him, is also intended to hint that the gathering in Hajj is not meant for the performance of certain rites and ceremonies but, as it were, for meeting God. In this case, the clause would be rendered as, "know that (in Hajj) you are brought together (i.e. the purpose of your gathering is) to meet God" and you must, therefore, behave accordingly. The gathering in Hajj is truly like the حشر (gathering) on the great Day of Judgement.
Now that the description of Hajj as given in these verses has come to an end, it would be appropriate to give here a brief but collective note on the wisdom and the significance of this act of worship and devotion. The Pilgrimage is indeed a great spiritual ordinance. According to the Quran, the Ka‘bah is the first house of worship that was built for mankind (3:97). It dates not from Abraham, who simply rebuilt it, but from Adam. The Quran speaks of it as "the Ancient House" (22:30, 34). A Jewish tradition also says that Abraham built "the altar which Adam had built, which had been destroyed by the waters of the Deluge, which Noah had again builded, and which had, been destroyed in the age of divisions" (The Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan ben Uzziel translated by J. W. Ethebridge, London, 1862, p. 226). The Ka‘bah is the only altar that answers this description; there is no other place so ancient. It was the purpose of God that men from all quarters should assemble at this central house and thus be reminded of their common humanity and common relation with the Lord of the worlds. Differences which divided one nation from another were to be forgotten and all drawn closer to one another in one common bond. The Hajj provides pilgrims of different lands and diverse nationalities with an excellent opportunity to cultivate acquaintance with one another and discuss matters of common interest. This purpose has been made all the more accessible by ordering pilgrims to pass the days of Hajj, and the days following, not within the four walls of Mecca but out in the open desert at Mina, Muzdalifah and ‘Arafat and back again in Mina.
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Quran as شعائرالله(2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which shows that they are meant by God to serve as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance.
The Ka‘bah or the Baitullah (the House of God), the very first house of worship round which thousands of devout pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which they all turn while offering their Prayers wherever they be, recalls to their mind the Unity and Majesty of God upon Whom depends all creation. It also reminds one of the unity of mankind.
The act of running between the Safa and the Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the pathetic story of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for his helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness.
Mina is a name derived from the word ’umniyyah which means "an object" or "a desire". This reminds the pilgrim of the fact that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. From Mina the pilgrim proceeds to Muzdalifah which means "nearness" and reminds him that the object with which he had set out has drawn "near". The other name of Muzdalifah is Mash‘arul-Haram, meaning the sacred symbol. This also hints that the final stage is near. From Muzdalifah, the pilgrim proceeds to ‘Arafat, the root-meaning of which is "to recognize". This reminds him that he has now reached the stage of "recognition" where he has "recognized" or known the One Lord and has met Him.
Again, the place chosen for this great concourse of the Faithful is a barren waste, devoid of all vegetation, as the Quran itself states (14:38). The only things that are met with there are sand, pebbles, rocks and rugged hillocks. Such a place has been chosen to bring home to us the fact that it possesses absolutely no attraction for which one might visit it. If there is anything for which one should go there, it is God and God alone. This is why in the present verse the Quran says, "know that you are being gathered here (not for any worldly object but) to meet Him".
Ihram reminds one of the Day of Resurrection. Like the shroud of a dead body, the pilgrim is covered only with two unsewn sheets, one for the upper part of the body and the other for the lower; and he also has to remain bareheaded. This condition is to remind him that he has here, as it were, risen from the dead. The pilgrims gathered together at ‘Arafat truly present the spectacle of the Day of Resurrection—men suddenly risen from the dead in their white shrouds and assembled in the presence of their Lord.
The casting of pebbles at the three pillars at Mina—known as Dunya, Wusta and ‘Aqabah, is also an interesting representation. It reminds the pilgrim of the three stages through which man has to pass and which have been referred to in the Quran as the three stages of human life, viz. (1) the present world, or Dunya as it is called, which is symbolized by the first pillar, significantly called Jamratud-Dunya, i.e. the pillar situated near; (2) the grave or the middle stage lying between this world and the next, the pillar corresponding to which is called Jamratul-Wusta, i.e. the middle pillar; and (3) the next world (known also as عقبی ‘Uqba) which is symbolized by the third pillar, which is accordingly called Jamratul-‘Aqabah, i.e. the pillar of the distant hillock that comes after the others. The casting of pebbles at these pillars is also symbolic of Satan being pelted. Evil thoughts should be driven out of one’s mind just as God has driven away Satan from His presence.
The animals sacrificed are reminders of the great sacrifice of his son Ishmael offered by Abraham, and teach, in symbolic language, that man should ever be willing not only to sacrifice himself but also his wealth and property and even children in the way of God out of love for Him.
Pilgrims perform seven circuits round the Ka‘bah, run seven times between the Safa and the Marwah and cast seven pebbles at the pillars at Mina. The number seven being regarded by the Arabs as a symbol of perfection (Aqrab), the pilgrim is thereby reminded that in Pilgrimage, as in all other things, he should not be satisfied with half measures. He should always aim at perfection and get it. It is significant that the stages of spiritual progress which lead man to perfection and which have been detailed in 23:2-12 are also seven.
In short, the various rites of the Hajj and the objects that play a part therein are all emblematic and are replete with great and momentous lessons, but only for those who care to meditate.
a
2:153.
145
这固定的日子是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 11, 12和13号, 在此期间朝觐者被要求尽可能逗留在米纳, 并在赞扬安拉的情况中度过他们的时光。那些日子被称为 اَيَّامُ التَّشْرِيْق (Ayyamut-Tashriq) 即光辉和美丽的日子。
146
朝觐的根本目的是达到 (敬畏), 这就是 «古兰经» 在2:198节中关于朝觐的训谕开头所用的词句。由此强调, 仅仅是某些仪式的表面奉行是无意义的, 除非它们伴之以应作为人类一切行为基础的敬畏精神。
147
在朝觐中起着重要作用的各种不同的事物与地方在 «古兰经» 中被认为是 شَعَائِرُالله (Sha‘a’i-rullah) (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) 即安拉的迹象, 这意味着安拉计划只把它们作为象征致使它们内在的意义铭刻在朝觐者心灵上。无数的朝觐者环绕着天房巡回, 所有穆斯林在就地礼拜时, 所朝向的天房, 使他们心中想起安拉的独一和庄严。它还提醒他们关于人类的统一。在萨法和马尔瓦之间奔跑的这一举动促使朝觐者在心中想起了这充满怜悯的哈贾尔 (夏甲) 和伊司马仪 (以实玛利) 的经历, 提醒他们, 安拉是如何为忠实的信者提供支持的, 即使他们在辽阔荒原的孤苦中无所依靠。مِنٰی (Mina) 源出 اُمْنِيَّة (Umniyyah--------一个目的或欲望)--------提醒朝觐者, 他应带着会遇安拉的 “目的” 或 “欲望” 去那里。含意为神圣的象征的马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆暗示最后的阶段即在眼前。阿腊法特使他想起他已经到了实现的阶段, 而受戒使他想起复活日。朝觐者只穿两块未缝合的布, 犹如死尸的裹尸布, 一块遮蔽上身, 一块遮蔽下身; 他还依然光着头呢。这种情况使他想起, 似乎他已经死而复活。朝觐者集合在呈现着复活日景象的阿腊法特--------人们突然从他们的白色裹尸布中复活了, 并集合在他们的养主面前。奉献的牲畜令人想起伊布拉欣以他儿子伊司马仪为牺牲, 而这牺牲以象征性的语言体现了一条教训, 人类为了安拉的道路应随时准备不仅牺牲他自身, 而且牺牲他的财富、产业、甚至他的子孙。
1
مُزدَلفہ سے واپس لوٹنے کے بعد منٰی میں تین دن رہنے کا حکم ہے مگر اجازت ہے کہ کوئی شخص دو دن کے بعد بھی لَوٹ آئے۔ اس جگہ اسی کا ذکر ہے۔ یہ ضروری نہیں کہ اگر تین دن رہے تو پھر چوتھا دن بھی اس کو رہنا پڑے گا‘ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ صرف دو دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے اور تیسرے دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے۔
a
See 2:153.
210
Commentary:
The glorification of God, or the celebration of His praises enjoined in the preceding verses is to be particularly observed in the appointed number of days to be spent in Mina after the Hajj is over. These are the 11th, the 12th and the 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in God’s glorification. In these days they are also required, as a symbol of the driving out of Satan, to cast pebbles daily at the three pillars so long as they stay there. These are called ایام التشریق i.e. the days of beauty and brightness.
The clause, whoso hastens to leave in two days, refers to the stay in Mina. If a pilgrim leaves Mina two days earlier or stays behind for two days more, no sin shall attach to him, provided everything he does is done with good intention, acting righteously and God-fearingly.
The verse ends with the clause, and fear Allah and know that you shall be brought together before Him, to bring home to the reader or the pilgrim that the underlying object of the Pilgrimage is تقوی, the very word with which the Quran began its commandments about Hajj in 2:197, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is nothing unless they are accompanied by تقوی or the spirit of righteousness which must underlie all actions of man.
The clause, واعلموا انکم الیه تحشرون translated above as, know that you shall all be brought together before Him, is also intended to hint that the gathering in Hajj is not meant for the performance of certain rites and ceremonies but, as it were, for meeting God. In this case, the clause would be rendered as, "know that (in Hajj) you are brought together (i.e. the purpose of your gathering is) to meet God" and you must, therefore, behave accordingly. The gathering in Hajj is truly like the حشر (gathering) on the great Day of Judgement.
Now that the description of Hajj as given in these verses has come to an end, it would be appropriate to give here a brief but collective note on the wisdom and the significance of this act of worship and devotion. The Pilgrimage is indeed a great spiritual ordinance. According to the Quran, the Ka‘bah is the first house of worship that was built for mankind (3:97). It dates not from Abraham, who simply rebuilt it, but from Adam. The Quran speaks of it as "the Ancient House" (22:30, 34). A Jewish tradition also says that Abraham built "the altar which Adam had built, which had been destroyed by the waters of the Deluge, which Noah had again builded, and which had, been destroyed in the age of divisions" (The Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan ben Uzziel translated by J. W. Ethebridge, London, 1862, p. 226). The Ka‘bah is the only altar that answers this description; there is no other place so ancient. It was the purpose of God that men from all quarters should assemble at this central house and thus be reminded of their common humanity and common relation with the Lord of the worlds. Differences which divided one nation from another were to be forgotten and all drawn closer to one another in one common bond. The Hajj provides pilgrims of different lands and diverse nationalities with an excellent opportunity to cultivate acquaintance with one another and discuss matters of common interest. This purpose has been made all the more accessible by ordering pilgrims to pass the days of Hajj, and the days following, not within the four walls of Mecca but out in the open desert at Mina, Muzdalifah and ‘Arafat and back again in Mina.
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Quran as شعائرالله(2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which shows that they are meant by God to serve as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance.
The Ka‘bah or the Baitullah (the House of God), the very first house of worship round which thousands of devout pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which they all turn while offering their Prayers wherever they be, recalls to their mind the Unity and Majesty of God upon Whom depends all creation. It also reminds one of the unity of mankind.
The act of running between the Safa and the Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the pathetic story of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for his helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness.
Mina is a name derived from the word ’umniyyah which means "an object" or "a desire". This reminds the pilgrim of the fact that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. From Mina the pilgrim proceeds to Muzdalifah which means "nearness" and reminds him that the object with which he had set out has drawn "near". The other name of Muzdalifah is Mash‘arul-Haram, meaning the sacred symbol. This also hints that the final stage is near. From Muzdalifah, the pilgrim proceeds to ‘Arafat, the root-meaning of which is "to recognize". This reminds him that he has now reached the stage of "recognition" where he has "recognized" or known the One Lord and has met Him.
Again, the place chosen for this great concourse of the Faithful is a barren waste, devoid of all vegetation, as the Quran itself states (14:38). The only things that are met with there are sand, pebbles, rocks and rugged hillocks. Such a place has been chosen to bring home to us the fact that it possesses absolutely no attraction for which one might visit it. If there is anything for which one should go there, it is God and God alone. This is why in the present verse the Quran says, "know that you are being gathered here (not for any worldly object but) to meet Him".
Ihram reminds one of the Day of Resurrection. Like the shroud of a dead body, the pilgrim is covered only with two unsewn sheets, one for the upper part of the body and the other for the lower; and he also has to remain bareheaded. This condition is to remind him that he has here, as it were, risen from the dead. The pilgrims gathered together at ‘Arafat truly present the spectacle of the Day of Resurrection—men suddenly risen from the dead in their white shrouds and assembled in the presence of their Lord.
The casting of pebbles at the three pillars at Mina—known as Dunya, Wusta and ‘Aqabah, is also an interesting representation. It reminds the pilgrim of the three stages through which man has to pass and which have been referred to in the Quran as the three stages of human life, viz. (1) the present world, or Dunya as it is called, which is symbolized by the first pillar, significantly called Jamratud-Dunya, i.e. the pillar situated near; (2) the grave or the middle stage lying between this world and the next, the pillar corresponding to which is called Jamratul-Wusta, i.e. the middle pillar; and (3) the next world (known also as عقبی ‘Uqba) which is symbolized by the third pillar, which is accordingly called Jamratul-‘Aqabah, i.e. the pillar of the distant hillock that comes after the others. The casting of pebbles at these pillars is also symbolic of Satan being pelted. Evil thoughts should be driven out of one’s mind just as God has driven away Satan from His presence.
The animals sacrificed are reminders of the great sacrifice of his son Ishmael offered by Abraham, and teach, in symbolic language, that man should ever be willing not only to sacrifice himself but also his wealth and property and even children in the way of God out of love for Him.
Pilgrims perform seven circuits round the Ka‘bah, run seven times between the Safa and the Marwah and cast seven pebbles at the pillars at Mina. The number seven being regarded by the Arabs as a symbol of perfection (Aqrab), the pilgrim is thereby reminded that in Pilgrimage, as in all other things, he should not be satisfied with half measures. He should always aim at perfection and get it. It is significant that the stages of spiritual progress which lead man to perfection and which have been detailed in 23:2-12 are also seven.
In short, the various rites of the Hajj and the objects that play a part therein are all emblematic and are replete with great and momentous lessons, but only for those who care to meditate.
b
See 2:153.
240
These are the 11th, 12th and 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in glorifying God. They are called Ayyamut-Tashriq, i.e. the days of brightness and beauty.
241
The underlying object of the Pilgrimage is the attainment of Taqwa (righteousness), the very word with which the Qur’an began its commandments about Hajj in 2:198, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is meaningless unless they are accompanied by the spirit of righteousness which should underlie all actions of man.
242
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Qur’an as Sha‘a’irullah (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which signifies that they are intended to serve only as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance. The Ka‘bah, round which thousands of pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which all Muslims turn while offering their Prayers wherever they may happen to be, recalls to their minds Divine Unity and the Majesty of God. It also reminds them of the unity of mankind. The act of running between Safa and Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the story, full of pathos, of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for His helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness. Mina, derived from Umniyyah (an object or a desire), reminds the pilgrim that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. Mash‘arul-Haram meaning, the sacred symbol, hints that the final stage
سَلْ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ كَمْ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُم مِّنْ ءَايَةٍۭ بَيِّنَةٍ ۗ وَمَن يُبَدِّلْ نِعْمَةَ ٱللَّهِ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَتْهُ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَدِيدُ ٱلْعِقَابِ
کَمْ سے مراد تعداد کی کثرت ہے اور مراد یہ ہے کہ ان سے پوچھو تو انہیں خود اقرار کرنا ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بہت سے کھلے کھلے نشانات ہمیں دئیے تھے۔
یہ مرادنہیں کہ وہ سزا دینے میں سخت ہے بلکہ یہ مراد ہے کہ اس کی سزا انسان پر سخت ہی گزرتی ہے۔
17:102; 28:37.
This does not mean that God is unnecessarily severe in punishment, but that Divine punishment is bound to be felt severely.
17:102; 28:37.
Commentary:
The preceding verses referred to those weak in faith who had not yet "come into submission wholly" (2:209). The position of these people was that they had received a favour of God but practically they sought to "change" it. They wished to be known as Muslims and yet to be free to live as they liked. This was exactly what the Israelites had done before. So the Quran fittingly turns here to the story of the children of Israel who afforded an object-lesson for Muslims. The Holy Prophet and, for that matter, every reader of the Quran is asked to enquire of the descendants of Israel how many and how varied were the Signs which God had bestowed upon them as a favour and how persistent and impudent was their rejection of His Messengers and their disregard of His teachings.
The expression, whoso changes the gift of God, appears to be rather peculiar; but really the word یبدل (changes) gives a very interesting meaning. For believers it means, accepting the teaching of a Prophet in theory but rejecting it in practice, as unfortunately is very often the case with the weak in faith. They receive a thing as a gift or blessing, but by abstaining from acting upon it, they incur the displeasure of God, thus practically "changing" a favour into a disfavour.
For disbelievers the expression means converting a مبشر Prophet into a منذر Prophet. The Quran speaks of the Prophets of God as a نعمة i.e. a favour or gift (5:21) and it further holds that the mission of every Prophet is twofold—he is a مبشر or bearer of glad tidings for those who accept him, and he is a منذر or warner of coming punishment for those who reject him (18:57). Now when God sends a Prophet, He wishes the people to accept him as a bearer of glad tidings only, and it is the people themselves who reverse the position by rejecting him. In this way the people, as it were, "change" the مبشر Prophet into the منذر Prophet.
Again, for Israelites or Jews the expression, whoso changes the gift of Allah, may mean that though they knew that their Scriptures embodied the word of God which was a favour and a blessing, yet they had the audacity to interfere with it in order to meet their own ends (5:14), thus "changing" the very substance of God’s favour.
The expression may have yet another meaning. The شریعة or Law being meant as a guidance, is a mercy or a blessing of God (5:4 & 6:155, 156). But Christians, who are an offshoot of the Jews have "changed" it into a curse (Gal. 3:13).
The expression "gift of God" may refer to the manifold and multifarious favours which God had bestowed upon the Israelites in the form of Prophets and their noble teachings. But they "changed" the gift of God by rejecting the Prophets and disobeying their teachings. The expression may also refer to the Holy Prophet and the religion brought by him; they are certainly the greatest gifts of God for mankind, and whoever rejects Islam either by disbelieving or disobeying its teachings, deserves God’s severest punishment. In either case, the verse also warns hypocrites and those weak of faith among Muslims that if they accepted the Holy Prophet outwardly but rejected him in their heart or if they accepted his teachings as being from God but did not act upon them, they would be "changing" the gift of God and would make themselves liable to severe punishment.
a
17:102; 28:37.
152
这并不意味着安拉的惩罚是不必要的严厉, 而是说安拉的惩罚必定令人感到严厉。
1
کَمْ سے مراد تعداد کی کثرت ہے اور مراد یہ ہے کہ ان سے پوچھو تو انہیں خود اقرار کرنا ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بہت سے کھلے کھلے نشانات ہمیں دئیے تھے۔
2
یہ مرادنہیں کہ وہ سزا دینے میں سخت ہے بلکہ یہ مراد ہے کہ اس کی سزا انسان پر سخت ہی گزرتی ہے۔
a
17:102; 28:37.
218
Commentary:
The preceding verses referred to those weak in faith who had not yet "come into submission wholly" (2:209). The position of these people was that they had received a favour of God but practically they sought to "change" it. They wished to be known as Muslims and yet to be free to live as they liked. This was exactly what the Israelites had done before. So the Quran fittingly turns here to the story of the children of Israel who afforded an object-lesson for Muslims. The Holy Prophet and, for that matter, every reader of the Quran is asked to enquire of the descendants of Israel how many and how varied were the Signs which God had bestowed upon them as a favour and how persistent and impudent was their rejection of His Messengers and their disregard of His teachings.
The expression, whoso changes the gift of God, appears to be rather peculiar; but really the word یبدل (changes) gives a very interesting meaning. For believers it means, accepting the teaching of a Prophet in theory but rejecting it in practice, as unfortunately is very often the case with the weak in faith. They receive a thing as a gift or blessing, but by abstaining from acting upon it, they incur the displeasure of God, thus practically "changing" a favour into a disfavour.
For disbelievers the expression means converting a مبشر Prophet into a منذر Prophet. The Quran speaks of the Prophets of God as a نعمة i.e. a favour or gift (5:21) and it further holds that the mission of every Prophet is twofold—he is a مبشر or bearer of glad tidings for those who accept him, and he is a منذر or warner of coming punishment for those who reject him (18:57). Now when God sends a Prophet, He wishes the people to accept him as a bearer of glad tidings only, and it is the people themselves who reverse the position by rejecting him. In this way the people, as it were, "change" the مبشر Prophet into the منذر Prophet.
Again, for Israelites or Jews the expression, whoso changes the gift of Allah, may mean that though they knew that their Scriptures embodied the word of God which was a favour and a blessing, yet they had the audacity to interfere with it in order to meet their own ends (5:14), thus "changing" the very substance of God’s favour.
The expression may have yet another meaning. The شریعة or Law being meant as a guidance, is a mercy or a blessing of God (5:4 & 6:155, 156). But Christians, who are an offshoot of the Jews have "changed" it into a curse (Gal. 3:13).
The expression "gift of God" may refer to the manifold and multifarious favours which God had bestowed upon the Israelites in the form of Prophets and their noble teachings. But they "changed" the gift of God by rejecting the Prophets and disobeying their teachings. The expression may also refer to the Holy Prophet and the religion brought by him; they are certainly the greatest gifts of God for mankind, and whoever rejects Islam either by disbelieving or disobeying its teachings, deserves God’s severest punishment. In either case, the verse also warns hypocrites and those weak of faith among Muslims that if they accepted the Holy Prophet outwardly but rejected him in their heart or if they accepted his teachings as being from God but did not act upon them, they would be "changing" the gift of God and would make themselves liable to severe punishment.
b
17:102; 28:37.
253
This does not mean that God is unnecessarily severe in punishment, but that Divine punishment is bound to be felt severely.
يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلشَّهْرِ ٱلْحَرَامِ قِتَالٍ فِيهِ ۖ قُلْ قِتَالٌ فِيهِ كَبِيرٌ ۖ وَصَدٌّ عَن سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَكُفْرٌۢ بِهِۦ وَٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ وَإِخْرَاجُ أَهْلِهِۦ مِنْهُ أَكْبَرُ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَٱلْفِتْنَةُ أَكْبَرُ مِنَ ٱلْقَتْلِ ۗ وَلَا يَزَالُونَ يُقَٰتِلُونَكُمْ حَتَّىٰ يَرُدُّوكُمْ عَن دِينِكُمْ إِنِ ٱسْتَطَٰعُوا۟ ۚ وَمَن يَرْتَدِدْ مِنكُمْ عَن دِينِهِۦ فَيَمُتْ وَهُوَ كَافِرٌ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ حَبِطَتْ أَعْمَٰلُهُمْ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ ۖ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلنَّارِ ۖ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ
2:192.
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
信者们被告知, 假如不信仰者亵渎了圣月的圣洁, 他们应毫不犹豫地在圣月中惩罚他们, 只有这样, 神圣事物的圣洁性才能得到保障 (2:195)。注释者通常阐述, 而事实上也有这样的传说, 大意是说, 有一次穆圣派遣阿布杜拉•彬•贾希 (عَبْدُالله بِنْ جَحْش, ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh) 去传递有关一伙古来西人出发去麦加的消息。当阿布杜拉 (عَبْدُالله, ‘Abdullah) 和他的同伴到达一个名叫纳赫拉 (نَخْلَة, Nakhla) 的地方时, 他们遇上了一小伙人。阿布杜拉袭击了这伙人, 杀死了其中的一个并俘获了两个。发生这件事的日期是有疑问的, 有的认为它是在圣月中, 而另一些不以为然。消息传到麦加, 古来西人利用关于日期的怀疑而提出抗议, 说是穆斯林亵渎了圣月。加注的本节经文就在当时被启示了。
یعنی ان دونوں کی حرمت کو ضائع کرنے کی کوشش کرنا ہے۔
2:192.
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
The believers were told that if disbelievers violated the sanctity of the Sacred Months, they should not hesitate to punish them in the Sacred Months, for thus alone could the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195). Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to this effect, that on one occasion the Holy Prophet sent ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his companions reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party. ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date on which this happened was doubtful, some considering it to be one within the Sacred Month and others not. The news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt and protested that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion.
2:192.
3:84, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
Important Words:
کبیر (great transgression) really stands for ذنب کبیر i.e. a great sin or great transgression or great offence. اکبر is in the comparative degree and means, a greater sin, etc.
صد (to hinder) is the infinitive from صد. They say صدہ i.e. he prevented him; he turned him back. صد عنه اومنه means, he kept back from it. Thus the word is both transitive and intransitive. صد, therefore, means: (1) to hinder or to prevent; (2) a hindrance or a barrier; (3) a mountain or a wall, etc., because it serves as a barrier (Aqrab).
یردوکم (turn you back) and یرتدد (turns back) are both derived from رد. They say ردہ i.e. he turned him back; and ارتد i.e.he himself turned back. ارتد عن الاسلام means, he turned back from Islam and reverted to a state of disbelief. مرتد means, one who turns back from his religion, particularly from Islam; one who apostatizes (Taj).
حبطت (shall be in vain). حبط البعیر means, the stomach of the camel became inflated and his belly became bound by eating unwholesome food. حبط عمله means: (1) his work or deed became null and void and went for nothing; (2) his work or deed became evil and corrupt. حبط دمه means, his blood went unavenged. حبط ماء البئر means, the water of the well receded and went down never to return to its original level (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words translated as "to be ungrateful to Him and the Sacred Mosque" may also be rendered as "to be ungrateful to Him and to hinder men from the Sacred Mosque".
The Quran has already explained that if disbelievers violate the sanctity of a sacred month, Muslims may also retaliate in a sacred month; for thus only can the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195).
The present verse provides a further reason for defending Islam, if need be, in a sacred month. Disbelievers, particularly those of Mecca, had violated the sanctity of things far more sacred than a "sacred month"––they were trying forcibly to turn men form the way of God; they were preventing people from approaching the Sacred Mosque and they had forced the Muslim dwellers of Mecca to flee from it. This was a form of persecution which was certainly much more heinous than fighting in a Sacred Month.
Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to the effect, that once the Holy Prophet sent one of his Companions, named ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh, to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his comrades reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party proceeding to Mecca. Guided by his own judgement and without any instruction to that effect from the Prophet, ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date was doubtful, some considering it to be as one of the Sacred Month and others as not. When the news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt as regards date and clamoured that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion (Tabari, Hisham & Zurqani).
The verse acknowledges the sanctity of the Sacred Months and considers it an act of sin and transgression knowingly to fight in a sacred month, but forcefully points out that the sanctities which disbelievers were violating were far more worthy of safeguarding. Disbelievers were forcibly preventing people from accepting Islam. They did not allow Muslims to approach the Sacred Mosque and they had mercilessly turned the Prophet and his followers out of their homes.
The verse should not be understood to imply that Muslims did start a fight in a sacred month, it only purports to bring home to disbelievers the fact that in view of their persistent violation of highly sacred thing, it does not lie in their mouth to accuse Muslim of violating the sanctity of a sacred month.
The clause it is they whose works shall be vain in this world and the next does not mean that everything that a renegade from Islam, or, for that matter, everything that a disbeliever, does will go for nothing and produce no result. The clause only means that such actions of the renegades as they might do to weaken the cause of Islam in this world as well as those of their actions which they might perform in opposition to the teaching of Islam in order to win the pleasure of God in the world to come, will all be in vain. Thus the clause does not refer to such good actions as a person may perform in the state o unbelief; for, as the Quran expressly states, these must have their reward (99:8) which may either take the form of the acceptance of Islam or that of the lightening of punishment. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said about his uncle Abu Talib that on account of the good treatment the latter extended to him, he is likely to be only lightly punished for his non-acceptance of Islam (Bukhari). On another occasion when Hakim bin Hizam, a nephew of his wife Khadijah, asked the Prophet whether he would get any reward for the good deeds he did before he accepted Islam, the Holy Prophet said, "your very acceptance of Islam is a reward thereof" (Bukhari).
The clause, their works shall be vain in this world and the next, also signifies that if such men as apostatize from Islam had not done so, their deeds would have brought them the great reward promised to Muslims both in this world and the next, but by apostatizing from Islam they had totally deprived themselves of this twofold reward.
Finally, the clause, and they will not cease fighting you until they turn you back from your faith, if they can, throws a flood of light on the attitude of disbelievers towards Muslim. They were not only the first to begin hostilities, but had also vowed not to cease fighting until Islam had been totally wiped out from Arabia and not a soul remained to call himself a Muslim. This clear testimony of the Quran should be an eye-opener for those who accuse Muslims of being aggressors in their early struggle against disbelievers. The words, if they can, are highly eulogistic of the Companions of the Holy Prophet. Do what they could, disbelievers would never be able to turn back Muslims from their faith. Their love for Islam was too deep to be extirpated by persecution however severe and bitter it might be.
b
2:192.
c
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
d
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
159
信者们被告知, 假如不信仰者亵渎了圣月的圣洁, 他们应毫不犹豫地在圣月中惩罚他们, 只有这样, 神圣事物的圣洁性才能得到保障 (2:195)。注释者通常阐述, 而事实上也有这样的传说, 大意是说, 有一次穆圣派遣阿布杜拉•彬•贾希 (عَبْدُالله بِنْ جَحْش, ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh) 去传递有关一伙古来西人出发去麦加的消息。当阿布杜拉 (عَبْدُالله, ‘Abdullah) 和他的同伴到达一个名叫纳赫拉 (نَخْلَة, Nakhla) 的地方时, 他们遇上了一小伙人。阿布杜拉袭击了这伙人, 杀死了其中的一个并俘获了两个。发生这件事的日期是有疑问的, 有的认为它是在圣月中, 而另一些不以为然。消息传到麦加, 古来西人利用关于日期的怀疑而提出抗议, 说是穆斯林亵渎了圣月。加注的本节经文就在当时被启示了。
2
یعنی ان دونوں کی حرمت کو ضائع کرنے کی کوشش کرنا ہے۔
a
2:192.
b
3:84, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
c
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
224
Important Words:
کبیر (great transgression) really stands for ذنب کبیر i.e. a great sin or great transgression or great offence. اکبر is in the comparative degree and means, a greater sin, etc.
صد (to hinder) is the infinitive from صد. They say صدہ i.e. he prevented him; he turned him back. صد عنه اومنه means, he kept back from it. Thus the word is both transitive and intransitive. صد, therefore, means: (1) to hinder or to prevent; (2) a hindrance or a barrier; (3) a mountain or a wall, etc., because it serves as a barrier (Aqrab).
یردوکم (turn you back) and یرتدد (turns back) are both derived from رد. They say ردہ i.e. he turned him back; and ارتد i.e.he himself turned back. ارتد عن الاسلام means, he turned back from Islam and reverted to a state of disbelief. مرتد means, one who turns back from his religion, particularly from Islam; one who apostatizes (Taj).
حبطت (shall be in vain). حبط البعیر means, the stomach of the camel became inflated and his belly became bound by eating unwholesome food. حبط عمله means: (1) his work or deed became null and void and went for nothing; (2) his work or deed became evil and corrupt. حبط دمه means, his blood went unavenged. حبط ماء البئر means, the water of the well receded and went down never to return to its original level (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words translated as "to be ungrateful to Him and the Sacred Mosque" may also be rendered as "to be ungrateful to Him and to hinder men from the Sacred Mosque".
The Quran has already explained that if disbelievers violate the sanctity of a sacred month, Muslims may also retaliate in a sacred month; for thus only can the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195).
The present verse provides a further reason for defending Islam, if need be, in a sacred month. Disbelievers, particularly those of Mecca, had violated the sanctity of things far more sacred than a "sacred month"––they were trying forcibly to turn men form the way of God; they were preventing people from approaching the Sacred Mosque and they had forced the Muslim dwellers of Mecca to flee from it. This was a form of persecution which was certainly much more heinous than fighting in a Sacred Month.
Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to the effect, that once the Holy Prophet sent one of his Companions, named ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh, to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his comrades reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party proceeding to Mecca. Guided by his own judgement and without any instruction to that effect from the Prophet, ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date was doubtful, some considering it to be as one of the Sacred Month and others as not. When the news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt as regards date and clamoured that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion (Tabari, Hisham & Zurqani).
The verse acknowledges the sanctity of the Sacred Months and considers it an act of sin and transgression knowingly to fight in a sacred month, but forcefully points out that the sanctities which disbelievers were violating were far more worthy of safeguarding. Disbelievers were forcibly preventing people from accepting Islam. They did not allow Muslims to approach the Sacred Mosque and they had mercilessly turned the Prophet and his followers out of their homes.
The verse should not be understood to imply that Muslims did start a fight in a sacred month, it only purports to bring home to disbelievers the fact that in view of their persistent violation of highly sacred thing, it does not lie in their mouth to accuse Muslim of violating the sanctity of a sacred month.
The clause it is they whose works shall be vain in this world and the next does not mean that everything that a renegade from Islam, or, for that matter, everything that a disbeliever, does will go for nothing and produce no result. The clause only means that such actions of the renegades as they might do to weaken the cause of Islam in this world as well as those of their actions which they might perform in opposition to the teaching of Islam in order to win the pleasure of God in the world to come, will all be in vain. Thus the clause does not refer to such good actions as a person may perform in the state o unbelief; for, as the Quran expressly states, these must have their reward (99:8) which may either take the form of the acceptance of Islam or that of the lightening of punishment. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said about his uncle Abu Talib that on account of the good treatment the latter extended to him, he is likely to be only lightly punished for his non-acceptance of Islam (Bukhari). On another occasion when Hakim bin Hizam, a nephew of his wife Khadijah, asked the Prophet whether he would get any reward for the good deeds he did before he accepted Islam, the Holy Prophet said, "your very acceptance of Islam is a reward thereof" (Bukhari).
The clause, their works shall be vain in this world and the next, also signifies that if such men as apostatize from Islam had not done so, their deeds would have brought them the great reward promised to Muslims both in this world and the next, but by apostatizing from Islam they had totally deprived themselves of this twofold reward.
Finally, the clause, and they will not cease fighting you until they turn you back from your faith, if they can, throws a flood of light on the attitude of disbelievers towards Muslim. They were not only the first to begin hostilities, but had also vowed not to cease fighting until Islam had been totally wiped out from Arabia and not a soul remained to call himself a Muslim. This clear testimony of the Quran should be an eye-opener for those who accuse Muslims of being aggressors in their early struggle against disbelievers. The words, if they can, are highly eulogistic of the Companions of the Holy Prophet. Do what they could, disbelievers would never be able to turn back Muslims from their faith. Their love for Islam was too deep to be extirpated by persecution however severe and bitter it might be.
a
2:192.
b
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
c
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
260
The believers were told that if disbelievers violated the sanctity of the Sacred Months, they should not hesitate to punish them in the Sacred Months, for thus alone could the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195). Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to this effect, that on one occasion the Holy Prophet sent ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his companions reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party. ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date on which this happened was doubtful, some considering it to be one within the Sacred Month and others not. The news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt and protested that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion.
ٱلطَّلَٰقُ مَرَّتَانِ ۖ فَإِمْسَاكٌۢ بِمَعْرُوفٍ أَوْ تَسْرِيحٌۢ بِإِحْسَٰنٍ ۗ وَلَا يَحِلُّ لَكُمْ أَن تَأْخُذُوا۟ مِمَّآ ءَاتَيْتُمُوهُنَّ شَيْـًٔا إِلَّآ أَن يَخَافَآ أَلَّا يُقِيمَا حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ أَلَّا يُقِيمَا حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَا فِيمَا ٱفْتَدَتْ بِهِۦ ۗ تِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا تَعْتَدُوهَا ۚ وَمَن يَتَعَدَّ حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلظَّٰلِمُونَ
2:228.
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
这节经文含有对离婚第五种约制。如果丈夫想和妻子离异, 他必须在三个不同时期声明离婚, 每次在她个别的洁净时期中并没有和她同过房, 在同一时期声明两次或三次离婚, 是不准许的。这在 مَرَّتَان (Marratan, 两次) 这一字中可以看出。这字的意思是, 发生在两个不同时期的一件事情, 而不是发生在同一时间的两件事情。穆圣把这种同一时间的集中声明, 不管几次, 都只作一次离婚声明看待 (تِرْمِذِی与داؤد)。根据纳萨伊 (نَسَائِی) 说, 有一天穆圣听到有人在同一时间内作了三次离婚声明, 非常生气地说, “在我还在你们中间时, 就把安拉的经典当儿戏吗?” 在第一和第二次声明离婚后, 丈夫在 عِدَّة (‘Iddat), 既等候时期内, 不论经过或不经过妻子的同意, 都可以召回离了婚的妻子; 但是等候时期过了以后, 他要经过她的同意而且要重新娶她才能收回。在第三次离婚后, 丈夫就丧失了这种权利, 这对夫妻就最终离异了。穆圣的一个伙伴有一次问他说, “«古兰经» 在这里只谈了两次离婚, 第三次离婚在什么地方?” 穆圣向他提到 “以厚道的做法辞离她们” 这句话, 意思是说, 第一和第二次离婚之后, 丈夫可以保留并且可以再娶她, 如果她也同意结婚的话; 但是如果他要最后离异的话, 他应与她离婚, 即第三次离婚 {جَرِيْر (Jarir) 与 مُسْنَد (Musnad)}。这一点在下一节经文中还要进一步说明。这样, 这里的 تَسْرِيْح (Tasrih) 这个字意为 طَلَاق (Talaq), 即离婚。
一个人和他的妻子离婚后, 他就丧失了他已给她的嫁妆 (办嫁妆的钱); 如果在离婚时他还没有给过她嫁妆, 在正式离婚之前, 他必须给她那笔钱。而且, 他不准许取回作为馈赠或礼物而给她的任何东西。
不过, 如果提出离婚的是女方, 法律上称为 خُلْع (khul‘), 她必须通过 قَاضِیْ (Qadi) 即法官, 正如 “你们 (双方) 害怕” 这几个字所暗示的那样。在这种情况下, 她必须归还男方全部或部分嫁妆以及男方过去送给她的礼品, 这要双方议定或由法官决定。盖斯•彬•撒比特 (قَيْس بِنْ ثَابِتْ, Qais bin Thabit) 的妻子杰米拉 (جَمِيْلَة, Jamilah) 那个案例提供了妇女行使 خُلْع 权的一个很好的实际说明。她要求和丈夫盖斯离婚, 理由是她不喜欢他, 也就是说, 他们性格不合, 不能相处在一起。穆圣给了他 خُلْع 的许可, 但是她必须把他给她的果园还给他 (布哈理)。
عام طور پر اس زمانہ کے علماء یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ جس نے تین دفعہ طلاق کہہ دیا اس کی طلاق بائن ہو جاتی ہے یعنی اس کی بیوی اس سے دوبارہ اس وقت تک شادی نہیں کر سکتی جب تک کسی اور سے نکاح نہ کر لے مگر یہ غلط ہے کیونکہ قرآن کریم میں صاف فرمایا گیا ہے اَلطَّـلَا قُ مَرَّتٰنِ یعنی وہ طلاق جو بائن نہیں وہ دو دفعہ ہو سکتی ہے اس طور پر کہ پہلے مرد طلاق دے پھر یا تو طلاق واپس لے لے اور رجوع کرے یا عدت گزرنے دے اور نکاح کرے۔ پھر اَن بَن کی صورت میں دوبارہ طلاق دے۔ پس ایسی طلاق کا دو دفعہ ہونا تو قطعی طور پر ثابت ہے۔ پس ایک ہی دفعہ تین یا تین سے زیادہ بار طلاق کہہ دینے کو بائن قرار دین
تمہیں یعنی ملتِ اسلامیہ یا اسلام پر ایمان رکھنے والی حکومت کو۔
اِنْ خِفْتُمْ میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر محکمہ قضا اس بات کا فیصلہ کرے کہ عورت خاوند کے پاس رہنے کے لئے راضی نہیں اور اس کی نارضا مندی کی وجہ سے مرد بھی عدل نہ رکھ سکے گا‘ تو عورت اگر کچھ دینا چاہے تو مرد کو اجازت ہے کہ کچھ مال لیکر اسے طلاق دے دے۔ لیکن وہ صرف اتنا ہی مال لے سکتا ہے جتنا اس نے خود دیا ہو اور کچھ نہیں۔
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate period of purity when he has not gone in unto her during that period. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as is hinted in the word Marratan (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time and said, "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?" After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘Iddat, i.e. the period of waiting, with or
When a person divorces his wife, he forfeits the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower- money, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as Khula‘, she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the words "you fear," in the plural number, hint. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed upon by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khula‘ by women. She demanded separation from her husband. Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different she could not get on with him. She was granted Khula‘ by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari).
See 2:228.
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
Important Words:
امساك (retain) is derived from امسك which is again derived from مسك. They say امسك به i.e. he stuck to it. امسك is both transitive and intransitive. امسكه means, he got hold of it and stopped and retained it. امسك عن الکلام means, he abstained from talking. امساك means, (1) to hold or stop or prevent or retain; (2) to refrain or abstain (Aqrab).
تسریح (send away) is the noun-infinitive from سرح (sarraha) which is derived from سرح. They say سرح المواشی i.e. the cattle went forth for grazing. سرح السیل means, the flood moved on leisurely. سرحه means, he sent him away. سرح فلان زوجته means, he sent away or divorced his wife (Aqrab).
حدود (limits) is the plural of حد i.e. a limit. حده means, he put a limit to it. حد الشیء عن الشیء means, he distinguished one thing from the other. الحد means, (1) the limit or the line where two things meet; (2) last limit or extremity of a thing; (3) that by which a thing may be defined; (4) prescribed punishment for an offence. حدود الله means God’s religious commandments (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks permanent and irrevocable separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate طھر i.e. period of purity, when the woman is clean and the man has not gone in unto her during that period of purity. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as the verse hints in the word مرتان (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time, and said: "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?"
After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘iddah, i.e. the period of waiting, with or without her consent; but after the period of waiting is over, he can take her back only with her consent and that after remarrying her. After the pronouncement of the third divorce, however, the husband forfeits this right and the couple are finally separated. A Companion of the Holy Prophet once asked him saying, "The Quran has here spoken of two divorces only, whence comes in the third!" The Prophet referred him to the Quranic words اوتسریح باحسان i.e. or send them away with kindness meaning thereby that after the pronouncement of the first two divorces the husband was free to retain his wife if he so desired but if he wanted irrevocable separation, he should "send her away", i.e. divorce her a third time (Jarir & Musnad). The point is further made clear in the succeeding verse. Thus the word تسریح here signifies طلاق i.e. divorce.
The present verse also makes it clear that when a person divorces his wife, he forfeits مھر i.e. the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower-money agreed on by the parties, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents as the clause it is not lawful for you that you take anything of what you have given them indicates.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as خلع (Khul‘a lit. the putting off of clothes etc., or the shedding of old leaves), she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the word خفتم (you fear), which has been put in the plural number, hints. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed on by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khul‘a by women. She demanded separation from her husband, Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different, she could not get on with him. She was granted Kkul‘a by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari). This right, however, is not to be exercised in a light-hearted manner. The Holy Prophet has condemned the action of a woman who demands separation from her husband without valid reason even as he has condemned the action of a man who divorces his wife without genuine cause. He is reported to have said, "A woman who seeks separation from her husband without a legitimate cause shall be deprived of the fragrance of heaven" (Dawud & Tirmidhi). This is what is hinted in the concluding words, these are the limits prescribed by Allah, so transgress them not, etc. The husband and the wife are both warned to fear God and refrain from transgressing the limits imposed by God for their own good.
b
2:228.
c
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
170
这节经文含有对离婚第五种约制。如果丈夫想和妻子离异, 他必须在三个不同时期声明离婚, 每次在她个别的洁净时期中并没有和她同过房, 在同一时期声明两次或三次离婚, 是不准许的。这在 مَرَّتَان (Marratan, 两次) 这一字中可以看出。这字的意思是, 发生在两个不同时期的一件事情, 而不是发生在同一时间的两件事情。穆圣把这种同一时间的集中声明, 不管几次, 都只作一次离婚声明看待 (تِرْمِذِی与داؤد)。根据纳萨伊 (نَسَائِی) 说, 有一天穆圣听到有人在同一时间内作了三次离婚声明, 非常生气地说, “在我还在你们中间时, 就把安拉的经典当儿戏吗?” 在第一和第二次声明离婚后, 丈夫在 عِدَّة (‘Iddat), 既等候时期内, 不论经过或不经过妻子的同意, 都可以召回离了婚的妻子; 但是等候时期过了以后, 他要经过她的同意而且要重新娶她才能收回。在第三次离婚后, 丈夫就丧失了这种权利, 这对夫妻就最终离异了。穆圣的一个伙伴有一次问他说, “«古兰经» 在这里只谈了两次离婚, 第三次离婚在什么地方?” 穆圣向他提到 “以厚道的做法辞离她们” 这句话, 意思是说, 第一和第二次离婚之后, 丈夫可以保留并且可以再娶她, 如果她也同意结婚的话; 但是如果他要最后离异的话, 他应与她离婚, 即第三次离婚 {جَرِيْر (Jarir) 与 مُسْنَد (Musnad)}。这一点在下一节经文中还要进一步说明。这样, 这里的 تَسْرِيْح (Tasrih) 这个字意为 طَلَاق (Talaq), 即离婚。
171
一个人和他的妻子离婚后, 他就丧失了他已给她的嫁妆 (办嫁妆的钱); 如果在离婚时他还没有给过她嫁妆, 在正式离婚之前, 他必须给她那笔钱。而且, 他不准许取回作为馈赠或礼物而给她的任何东西。
172
不过, 如果提出离婚的是女方, 法律上称为 خُلْع (khul‘), 她必须通过 قَاضِیْ (Qadi) 即法官, 正如 “你们 (双方) 害怕” 这几个字所暗示的那样。在这种情况下, 她必须归还男方全部或部分嫁妆以及男方过去送给她的礼品, 这要双方议定或由法官决定。盖斯•彬•撒比特 (قَيْس بِنْ ثَابِتْ, Qais bin Thabit) 的妻子杰米拉 (جَمِيْلَة, Jamilah) 那个案例提供了妇女行使 خُلْع 权的一个很好的实际说明。她要求和丈夫盖斯离婚, 理由是她不喜欢他, 也就是说, 他们性格不合, 不能相处在一起。穆圣给了他 خُلْع 的许可, 但是她必须把他给她的果园还给他 (布哈理)。
1
عام طور پر اس زمانہ کے علماء یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ جس نے تین دفعہ طلاق کہہ دیا اس کی طلاق بائن ہو جاتی ہے یعنی اس کی بیوی اس سے دوبارہ اس وقت تک شادی نہیں کر سکتی جب تک کسی اور سے نکاح نہ کر لے مگر یہ غلط ہے کیونکہ قرآن کریم میں صاف فرمایا گیا ہے اَلطَّـلَا قُ مَرَّتٰنِ یعنی وہ طلاق جو بائن نہیں وہ دو دفعہ ہو سکتی ہے اس طور پر کہ پہلے مرد طلاق دے پھر یا تو طلاق واپس لے لے اور رجوع کرے یا عدت گزرنے دے اور نکاح کرے۔ پھر اَن بَن کی صورت میں دوبارہ طلاق دے۔ پس ایسی طلاق کا دو دفعہ ہونا تو قطعی طور پر ثابت ہے۔ پس ایک ہی دفعہ تین یا تین سے زیادہ بار طلاق کہہ دینے کو بائن قرار دین
2
تمہیں یعنی ملتِ اسلامیہ یا اسلام پر ایمان رکھنے والی حکومت کو۔
3
اِنْ خِفْتُمْ میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر محکمہ قضا اس بات کا فیصلہ کرے کہ عورت خاوند کے پاس رہنے کے لئے راضی نہیں اور اس کی نارضا مندی کی وجہ سے مرد بھی عدل نہ رکھ سکے گا‘ تو عورت اگر کچھ دینا چاہے تو مرد کو اجازت ہے کہ کچھ مال لیکر اسے طلاق دے دے۔ لیکن وہ صرف اتنا ہی مال لے سکتا ہے جتنا اس نے خود دیا ہو اور کچھ نہیں۔
a
See 2:228.
b
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
236
Important Words:
امساك (retain) is derived from امسك which is again derived from مسك. They say امسك به i.e. he stuck to it. امسك is both transitive and intransitive. امسكه means, he got hold of it and stopped and retained it. امسك عن الکلام means, he abstained from talking. امساك means, (1) to hold or stop or prevent or retain; (2) to refrain or abstain (Aqrab).
تسریح (send away) is the noun-infinitive from سرح (sarraha) which is derived from سرح. They say سرح المواشی i.e. the cattle went forth for grazing. سرح السیل means, the flood moved on leisurely. سرحه means, he sent him away. سرح فلان زوجته means, he sent away or divorced his wife (Aqrab).
حدود (limits) is the plural of حد i.e. a limit. حده means, he put a limit to it. حد الشیء عن الشیء means, he distinguished one thing from the other. الحد means, (1) the limit or the line where two things meet; (2) last limit or extremity of a thing; (3) that by which a thing may be defined; (4) prescribed punishment for an offence. حدود الله means God’s religious commandments (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks permanent and irrevocable separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate طھر i.e. period of purity, when the woman is clean and the man has not gone in unto her during that period of purity. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as the verse hints in the word مرتان (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time, and said: "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?"
After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘iddah, i.e. the period of waiting, with or without her consent; but after the period of waiting is over, he can take her back only with her consent and that after remarrying her. After the pronouncement of the third divorce, however, the husband forfeits this right and the couple are finally separated. A Companion of the Holy Prophet once asked him saying, "The Quran has here spoken of two divorces only, whence comes in the third!" The Prophet referred him to the Quranic words اوتسریح باحسان i.e. or send them away with kindness meaning thereby that after the pronouncement of the first two divorces the husband was free to retain his wife if he so desired but if he wanted irrevocable separation, he should "send her away", i.e. divorce her a third time (Jarir & Musnad). The point is further made clear in the succeeding verse. Thus the word تسریح here signifies طلاق i.e. divorce.
The present verse also makes it clear that when a person divorces his wife, he forfeits مھر i.e. the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower-money agreed on by the parties, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents as the clause it is not lawful for you that you take anything of what you have given them indicates.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as خلع (Khul‘a lit. the putting off of clothes etc., or the shedding of old leaves), she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the word خفتم (you fear), which has been put in the plural number, hints. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed on by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khul‘a by women. She demanded separation from her husband, Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different, she could not get on with him. She was granted Kkul‘a by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari). This right, however, is not to be exercised in a light-hearted manner. The Holy Prophet has condemned the action of a woman who demands separation from her husband without valid reason even as he has condemned the action of a man who divorces his wife without genuine cause. He is reported to have said, "A woman who seeks separation from her husband without a legitimate cause shall be deprived of the fragrance of heaven" (Dawud & Tirmidhi). This is what is hinted in the concluding words, these are the limits prescribed by Allah, so transgress them not, etc. The husband and the wife are both warned to fear God and refrain from transgressing the limits imposed by God for their own good.
b
2:228.c
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
280
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate period of purity when he has not gone in unto her during that period. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as is hinted in the word Marratan (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time and said, "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?" After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘Iddat, i.e. the period of waiting, with or
281
When a person divorces his wife, he forfeits the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower- money, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents.
282
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as Khula‘, she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the words "you fear," in the plural number, hint. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed upon by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khula‘ by women. She demanded separation from her husband. Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different she could not get on with him. She was granted Khula‘ by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari).
وَإِذَا طَلَّقْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ فَبَلَغْنَ أَجَلَهُنَّ فَأَمْسِكُوهُنَّ بِمَعْرُوفٍ أَوْ سَرِّحُوهُنَّ بِمَعْرُوفٍ ۚ وَلَا تُمْسِكُوهُنَّ ضِرَارًا لِّتَعْتَدُوا۟ ۚ وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ فَقَدْ ظَلَمَ نَفْسَهُۥ ۚ وَلَا تَتَّخِذُوٓا۟ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ هُزُوًا ۚ وَٱذْكُرُوا۟ نِعْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَمَآ أَنزَلَ عَلَيْكُم مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ وَٱلْحِكْمَةِ يَعِظُكُم بِهِۦ ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌ
2:229; 65:5.
2:230.
3:104.
从上下文中很清楚地可以看出, 这里谈的是可以撤回的离婚。在这种离婚声明后, 丈夫前面只有两条路可走。要么他挽留妻子并善意地对待她, 要么以厚道的做法与她离婚。他不准虐待她, 使她处于一种悬挂状态。
بَلَغَ الْاَجَلَ کے دو معنے ہیں۔ یہ بھی کہ مدت کے خاتمہ کے قریب پہنچ گیا اور یہ بھی کہ مدت پوری کرلی۔ اس جگہ پہلے معنے مراد ہیں۔ علامہ قرطبی ہسپانوی مفسر لکھتے ہیں کہ اس آیت میں اول الذکر معنوں پر تمام علمائے امت کا اتفاق ہے۔ کسی نے اس کے خلاف نہیں کہا۔ عربی کا محاورہ ہے کہ جب مسافر شہر کے قریب پہنچتا ہے تو کہتا ہے کہ بَلَغْنَا الْبَلَدَ ہم شہر پہنچ گئے۔ اردو میں بھی یہ استعمال کثرت سے پایا جاتا ہے فَامْسِکُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ اَوْ سَرِّحُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ میں اس بات پر زور دیا کہ عورتوں سے دو ہی قسم کا سلوک کرنے کا حکم ہے۔ یا تو انہیں مناسب رنگ م
’’ان کو روک لو‘‘ سے مراد یہ ہے کہ رجوع کرلو اور طلاق واپس لے لو۔ مگر فرماتا ہے یہ رجوع معروف طریق پر ہونا چاہییٔ۔ ایسا نہ ہو کہ عورت کی بدنامی ہو اور یا پھر ان کو طلاق تو دے دو مگر طلاق دیتے وقت بھی یہ خیال رکھو کہ ان کے ساتھ حسن سلوک ہو۔ ان کو ذلیل اور بدنام نہ کرو۔
2:229; 65:5.
See 2:230.
3:104.
The expression Balaghal-Ajala means, he approached the end of the period; or he reached the end of, or completed, the period. According to consensus of scholarly opinion, the first meaning applies here (Qurtubi).
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense.
2:229; 65:5.
See 2:230.
3:104.
Important Words:
بلغن (they approach) is from بلغ which means, he reached or came to or attained; or he was near to reaching or attaining (Lane).
اجل (period) is the noun-infinitive from the verb اجل meaning, he or it delayed or fell short. اجل الشیء means, he appointed a time or period for the thing. اجل therefore means, the term or period appointed or specified for a thing; also the end of such period. Death is called اجل because for every life there is an appointed time when it must come to an end (Aqrab Lane).
یعظکم (exhorts you). یعظ is derived from وعظ meaning, he gave him good advice; he exhorted him; he admonished him; he warned him of the consequences of his actions and called him to a life of righteousness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse contains a general injunction about the treatment of divorced women.
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced, there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or he may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense. The concluding part of the verse warns the husband against making light of the commandments of Allah relating to the rights of women, adding that, God being All-Knowing, even the hidden intentions and secret machinations of man are known to Him.
a
2:229; 65:5.
b
2:230.
c
3:104.
174
从上下文中很清楚地可以看出, 这里谈的是可以撤回的离婚。在这种离婚声明后, 丈夫前面只有两条路可走。要么他挽留妻子并善意地对待她, 要么以厚道的做法与她离婚。他不准虐待她, 使她处于一种悬挂状态。
3
بَلَغَ الْاَجَلَ کے دو معنے ہیں۔ یہ بھی کہ مدت کے خاتمہ کے قریب پہنچ گیا اور یہ بھی کہ مدت پوری کرلی۔ اس جگہ پہلے معنے مراد ہیں۔ علامہ قرطبی ہسپانوی مفسر لکھتے ہیں کہ اس آیت میں اول الذکر معنوں پر تمام علمائے امت کا اتفاق ہے۔ کسی نے اس کے خلاف نہیں کہا۔ عربی کا محاورہ ہے کہ جب مسافر شہر کے قریب پہنچتا ہے تو کہتا ہے کہ بَلَغْنَا الْبَلَدَ ہم شہر پہنچ گئے۔ اردو میں بھی یہ استعمال کثرت سے پایا جاتا ہے فَامْسِکُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ اَوْ سَرِّحُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ میں اس بات پر زور دیا کہ عورتوں سے دو ہی قسم کا سلوک کرنے کا حکم ہے۔ یا تو انہیں مناسب رنگ م
4
’’ان کو روک لو‘‘ سے مراد یہ ہے کہ رجوع کرلو اور طلاق واپس لے لو۔ مگر فرماتا ہے یہ رجوع معروف طریق پر ہونا چاہییٔ۔ ایسا نہ ہو کہ عورت کی بدنامی ہو اور یا پھر ان کو طلاق تو دے دو مگر طلاق دیتے وقت بھی یہ خیال رکھو کہ ان کے ساتھ حسن سلوک ہو۔ ان کو ذلیل اور بدنام نہ کرو۔
a
2:229; 65:5.
b
See 2:230.
c
3:104.
238
Important Words:
بلغن (they approach) is from بلغ which means, he reached or came to or attained; or he was near to reaching or attaining (Lane).
اجل (period) is the noun-infinitive from the verb اجل meaning, he or it delayed or fell short. اجل الشیء means, he appointed a time or period for the thing. اجل therefore means, the term or period appointed or specified for a thing; also the end of such period. Death is called اجل because for every life there is an appointed time when it must come to an end (Aqrab Lane).
یعظکم (exhorts you). یعظ is derived from وعظ meaning, he gave him good advice; he exhorted him; he admonished him; he warned him of the consequences of his actions and called him to a life of righteousness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse contains a general injunction about the treatment of divorced women.
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced, there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or he may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense. The concluding part of the verse warns the husband against making light of the commandments of Allah relating to the rights of women, adding that, God being All-Knowing, even the hidden intentions and secret machinations of man are known to Him.
a
2:229; 65:5.
b
See 2:230.
c
3:104.
283A
The expression Balaghal-Ajala means, he approached the end of the period; or he reached the end of, or completed, the period. According to consensus of scholarly opinion, the first meaning applies here (Qurtubi).
284
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense.
فَلَمَّا فَصَلَ طَالُوتُ بِٱلْجُنُودِ قَالَ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ مُبْتَلِيكُم بِنَهَرٍ فَمَن شَرِبَ مِنْهُ فَلَيْسَ مِنِّى وَمَن لَّمْ يَطْعَمْهُ فَإِنَّهُۥ مِنِّىٓ إِلَّا مَنِ ٱغْتَرَفَ غُرْفَةًۢ بِيَدِهِۦ ۚ فَشَرِبُوا۟ مِنْهُ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا مِّنْهُمْ ۚ فَلَمَّا جَاوَزَهُۥ هُوَ وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ مَعَهُۥ قَالُوا۟ لَا طَاقَةَ لَنَا ٱلْيَوْمَ بِجَالُوتَ وَجُنُودِهِۦ ۚ قَالَ ٱلَّذِينَ يَظُنُّونَ أَنَّهُم مُّلَٰقُوا۟ ٱللَّهِ كَم مِّن فِئَةٍ قَلِيلَةٍ غَلَبَتْ فِئَةً كَثِيرَةًۢ بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ مَعَ ٱلصَّٰبِرِينَ
3:124; 8:66.
فَصَلَ الرَّجُلُ عَنِ الْبَلْدَۃِ کے معنے ہیں خَرَجَ مِنْہُ۔ شہر سے نکلا۔ (اقرب)
نَھَر کا ترجمہ ندی کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن ھَاء کی زبر سے جب یہ لفظ ہو تو اس کے دو معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) ندی (۲) فراخی اور وسعت (مفردات) چنانچہ کہتے ہیں۔ نَھَرٌ نَھِرٌ بہت پانی والی ندی (مفردات) اس آیت میں دونوں معنے ہی لگ سکتے ہیں۔ اگر فراخی اور وسعت کے معنے کیے جائیں تو آیت کا یہ مطلب ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بادشاہ کے ذریعہ سے فوجیوں کو اطلاع دی کہ تمہارا امتحان مال و دولت سے لیا جائے گا۔ اگر تم مال و دولت کے پیچھے پڑ گئے تو خداتعالیٰ کا کام نہ کر سکو گے اور اگر تم مال و دولت سے متاثر نہ ہوئے تو تم کو کامیابی ہوگی۔ جیسا کہ پہلے نوٹ میں بتایا جا چکا ہے۔ طالوت سے مراد جدعو
3:124; 8:66.
The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) To afford the marching force some essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; (2) To make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier for a person to withhold himself from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. See Judg. 7: 5, 6. The word Nahar also means "plenty." In this sense of the word the verse signifies that they would be tried by "plenty;" those who succumbed to its temptations would no longer be fit to carry on God’s work, but those who used it with restraint would achieve success.
Jalut is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who are unruly and go about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (I Sam. 17: 4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits," or "a leader" or "a giant" (Enc. Bib.; Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Qur’an appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
3:124; 8:66.
Important Words:
نـھر (river). The verb نـھر means, it flowed with force. They say نـھر الدام i.e. the blood poured forth with force. نـھر الماء means, the water poured forth in the land and cut out a channel for itself. النـھر (an-nahr) means, a body of flowing water, i.e. stream or river; channel through which such water flows. النھر (an-nahr) means, (1) plenty and abundance; (2) a river channel; (3) a river (Aqrab).
الجنود (forces) is the plural of الجـند. They say جند الجنود i.e. he collected or gathered together his forces. الجند means, a force or an army ; helpers (Aqrab).
جالوت (Jalut) is derived from جال i.e. he ran about without stopping. They say جال الفرس فی المیدان i.e. the horse galloped about in the field, sometimes going this way and sometimes that way. جال القوم جولة means, the people drew back and then made a joint onslaught. جال بعضھم علی بعض means, they assailed or assaulted one another in battle, etc. (Aqrab & Taj). Thus جالوت is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who is unruly and moves about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (1 Sam. 17:4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits" or "a leader or a giant" (Enc. Bib. and Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Quran appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
Commentary:
Self-control and discipline are the key to most successes, and possession of these qualities is necessary to successfully meet God’s trials. The present verse speaks of one such trial. The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) to afford the marching force an essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; and (2) to make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier to withhold from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. The Bible mentions the incident in Judg. 7:5-6.
The concluding clause, i.e. how many a small party has triumphed over a large party by Allah’s command, contains a mighty lesson of hope for the righteous. When God wills a thing, numbers do not matter. The truth of this statement has been borne out by history in all ages.
The Jalut spoken of in this verse does not signify a person but a people, while the word جنود (forces) points to the helpers and associates of these people. The Bible refers to Jalut under the name of Midianites who pillaged and harassed the Israelites and destroyed their land for several years (Judg. 6:1-6). The Amalekites and all the eastern tribes assisted the Midianites in their raids (Judg. 6:1) and formed "the forces" referred to in the verse.
a
3:124; 8:66.
1
فَصَلَ الرَّجُلُ عَنِ الْبَلْدَۃِ کے معنے ہیں خَرَجَ مِنْہُ۔ شہر سے نکلا۔ (اقرب)
2
نَھَر کا ترجمہ ندی کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن ھَاء کی زبر سے جب یہ لفظ ہو تو اس کے دو معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) ندی (۲) فراخی اور وسعت (مفردات) چنانچہ کہتے ہیں۔ نَھَرٌ نَھِرٌ بہت پانی والی ندی (مفردات) اس آیت میں دونوں معنے ہی لگ سکتے ہیں۔ اگر فراخی اور وسعت کے معنے کیے جائیں تو آیت کا یہ مطلب ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بادشاہ کے ذریعہ سے فوجیوں کو اطلاع دی کہ تمہارا امتحان مال و دولت سے لیا جائے گا۔ اگر تم مال و دولت کے پیچھے پڑ گئے تو خداتعالیٰ کا کام نہ کر سکو گے اور اگر تم مال و دولت سے متاثر نہ ہوئے تو تم کو کامیابی ہوگی۔ جیسا کہ پہلے نوٹ میں بتایا جا چکا ہے۔ طالوت سے مراد جدعو
a
3:124; 8:66.
256
Important Words:
نـھر (river). The verb نـھر means, it flowed with force. They say نـھر الدام i.e. the blood poured forth with force. نـھر الماء means, the water poured forth in the land and cut out a channel for itself. النـھر (an-nahr) means, a body of flowing water, i.e. stream or river; channel through which such water flows. النھر (an-nahr) means, (1) plenty and abundance; (2) a river channel; (3) a river (Aqrab).
الجنود (forces) is the plural of الجـند. They say جند الجنود i.e. he collected or gathered together his forces. الجند means, a force or an army ; helpers (Aqrab).
جالوت (Jalut) is derived from جال i.e. he ran about without stopping. They say جال الفرس فی المیدان i.e. the horse galloped about in the field, sometimes going this way and sometimes that way. جال القوم جولة means, the people drew back and then made a joint onslaught. جال بعضھم علی بعض means, they assailed or assaulted one another in battle, etc. (Aqrab & Taj). Thus جالوت is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who is unruly and moves about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (1 Sam. 17:4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits" or "a leader or a giant" (Enc. Bib. and Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Quran appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
Commentary:
Self-control and discipline are the key to most successes, and possession of these qualities is necessary to successfully meet God’s trials. The present verse speaks of one such trial. The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) to afford the marching force an essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; and (2) to make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier to withhold from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. The Bible mentions the incident in Judg. 7:5-6.
The concluding clause, i.e. how many a small party has triumphed over a large party by Allah’s command, contains a mighty lesson of hope for the righteous. When God wills a thing, numbers do not matter. The truth of this statement has been borne out by history in all ages.
The Jalut spoken of in this verse does not signify a person but a people, while the word جنود (forces) points to the helpers and associates of these people. The Bible refers to Jalut under the name of Midianites who pillaged and harassed the Israelites and destroyed their land for several years (Judg. 6:1-6). The Amalekites and all the eastern tribes assisted the Midianites in their raids (Judg. 6:1) and formed "the forces" referred to in the verse.
a
3:124; 8:66.
310
The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) To afford the marching force some essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; (2) To make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier for a person to withhold himself from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. See Judg. 7: 5, 6. The word Nahar also means "plenty." In this sense of the word the verse signifies that they would be tried by "plenty;" those who succumbed to its temptations would no longer be fit to carry on God’s work, but those who used it with restraint would achieve success.
310A
Jalut is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who are unruly and go about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (I Sam. 17: 4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits," or "a leader" or "a giant" (Enc. Bib.; Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Qur’an appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
يُؤْتِى ٱلْحِكْمَةَ مَن يَشَآءُ ۚ وَمَن يُؤْتَ ٱلْحِكْمَةَ فَقَدْ أُوتِىَ خَيْرًا كَثِيرًا ۗ وَمَا يَذَّكَّرُ إِلَّآ أُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْأَلْبَٰبِ
17:40.
17:40.
The verse means that the injunction, regarding spending wealth in charity which is the secret of national progress and prosperity, is based on wisdom.
17:40.
Commentary:
The verse points out that the injunction regarding spending wealth in charity, which is the secret of national advancement, is based on wisdom. The word حکمة (wisdom) also alludes to the fulfilment of the prayer which Abraham had offered to God for the raising of a Prophet among the Meccans, who should teach them the Book and Wisdom (2:130).
The people who receive wisdom receive "an abundant good" and are thus sure to thrive and prosper if they act on it.
b
17:40.
a
17:40.
276
Commentary:
The verse points out that the injunction regarding spending wealth in charity, which is the secret of national advancement, is based on wisdom. The word حکمة (wisdom) also alludes to the fulfilment of the prayer which Abraham had offered to God for the raising of a Prophet among the Meccans, who should teach them the Book and Wisdom (2:130).
The people who receive wisdom receive "an abundant good" and are thus sure to thrive and prosper if they act on it.
a
17:40.
340
The verse means that the injunction, regarding spending wealth in charity which is the secret of national progress and prosperity, is based on wisdom.
۞ وَإِن كُنتُمْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ وَلَمْ تَجِدُوا۟ كَاتِبًا فَرِهَٰنٌ مَّقْبُوضَةٌ ۖ فَإِنْ أَمِنَ بَعْضُكُم بَعْضًا فَلْيُؤَدِّ ٱلَّذِى ٱؤْتُمِنَ أَمَٰنَتَهُۥ وَلْيَتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ رَبَّهُۥ ۗ وَلَا تَكْتُمُوا۟ ٱلشَّهَٰدَةَ ۚ وَمَن يَكْتُمْهَا فَإِنَّهُۥٓ ءَاثِمٌ قَلْبُهُۥ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ عَلِيمٌ
2:141; 5:107.
Loans may also be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of it. This form of practical transaction will be in the nature of an Amanah, i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By identifying a loan with a trust it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
2:141; 5:107.
Important Words:
رھان (pledge) is derived from رھن. They say رھن الشیء فلانا او عند فلان i.e. he deposited the thing with him or gave it in his possession as a pledge or security for a debt, etc. راھن is one who makes such a pledge and مرتھن is one who receives it. رھینand مرھون mean, the thing so pledged; the thing placed or kept in custody in lieu of a debt, etc. رھان which is the noun-infinitive from راھن and رھن (rahn) which is the noun-infinitive from رھن (rahana) mean, the act of pledging; also the thing pledged. رھان is also the plural of رھن (Aqrab & Lane).
امانة (trust) and اوتمن (is entrusted) and امن (entrusts) are all derived from the same root. امن means, he trusted or he entrusted. ائتمن فلانا علی کذا means, he trusted him with that; he deposited it with him as a trust. امانة means, the thing committed to the trust and care of a person; also honesty, faithfulness and trustworthiness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a scribe is not available, loans may be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of this loan. This form of practical transaction, the verse goes on to explain, will be in the nature of an امانة i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By classing a loan with a trust, it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and the same honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
The words, and conceal not testimony, either refer to the testimony of such witnesses as may be present at the time of the pledge, or it may refer to the testimony of the parties themselves. When no other witness is available, the parties are themselves treated as such and may be called upon to give a true account of the affairs on oath.
The expression, his heart is sinful, signifies that he who conceals testimony commits a sin which has not a temporary effect but vitiates the innermost recesses of his heart. Nay, it is a sign of the fact that his heart has already become vitiated.
b
2:141; 5:107.
213
贷款也可以抵押的方式进行,一方得到贷款而另一方得到作为与此相等的抵押品。这种实际交易方式的性质称为 اَمَانَة (Amanah), 即涉及双方的信托或押金。用一种抵押品来鉴定一笔贷款, 意思是说, 贷款必需小心公正地按约如数归还的同时, 作为抵押品的财产也要以同样精神归还原主。
a
2:141; 5:107.
290
Important Words:
رھان (pledge) is derived from رھن. They say رھن الشیء فلانا او عند فلان i.e. he deposited the thing with him or gave it in his possession as a pledge or security for a debt, etc. راھن is one who makes such a pledge and مرتھن is one who receives it. رھینand مرھون mean, the thing so pledged; the thing placed or kept in custody in lieu of a debt, etc. رھان which is the noun-infinitive from راھن and رھن (rahn) which is the noun-infinitive from رھن (rahana) mean, the act of pledging; also the thing pledged. رھان is also the plural of رھن (Aqrab & Lane).
امانة (trust) and اوتمن (is entrusted) and امن (entrusts) are all derived from the same root. امن means, he trusted or he entrusted. ائتمن فلانا علی کذا means, he trusted him with that; he deposited it with him as a trust. امانة means, the thing committed to the trust and care of a person; also honesty, faithfulness and trustworthiness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a scribe is not available, loans may be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of this loan. This form of practical transaction, the verse goes on to explain, will be in the nature of an امانة i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By classing a loan with a trust, it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and the same honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
The words, and conceal not testimony, either refer to the testimony of such witnesses as may be present at the time of the pledge, or it may refer to the testimony of the parties themselves. When no other witness is available, the parties are themselves treated as such and may be called upon to give a true account of the affairs on oath.
The expression, his heart is sinful, signifies that he who conceals testimony commits a sin which has not a temporary effect but vitiates the innermost recesses of his heart. Nay, it is a sign of the fact that his heart has already become vitiated.
a
2:141; 5:107.
355
Loans may also be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of it. This form of practical transaction will be in the nature of an Amanah, i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By identifying a loan with a trust it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
إِنَّ ٱلدِّينَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ ٱلْإِسْلَٰمُ ۗ وَمَا ٱخْتَلَفَ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ إِلَّا مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَهُمُ ٱلْعِلْمُ بَغْيًۢا بَيْنَهُمْ ۗ وَمَن يَكْفُرْ بِـَٔايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ سَرِيعُ ٱلْحِسَابِ
3:86.
一切宗教都谆谆劝导信仰安拉的独一性, 并归顺他的意志。而只有在伊斯兰教中, 完全归顺安拉的思想才是完美的, 因为完全归顺必须彻底显现出安拉的常德, 而只有在伊斯兰教中才会有这种显现。因此在一切宗教体系中, 只有伊斯兰教才真正配得上称为安拉自己的宗教。实际上, 一切真正的宗教, 他们在原来的形式上多少都是具有伊斯兰教性质的, 而它们的信徒实在就是穆斯林。但是直到宗教在其一切不同的方面趋于完善的时候才取名为 اَلْاِسْلام (Al-Islam), 这个名字确是为了最后的教律而在 «古兰经» 中被保留下来的。此节经文进一步解释了2:63。
3:86.
All religions inculcate belief in the Oneness of God and submission to His Will, yet it is only in Islam that the idea of submission to God’s Will has found its consummation; for complete submission requires complete manifestation of God’s attributes and it is in Islam alone that such manifestation has taken place. So of all religious systems Islam alone deserves to be called God’s own religion in the real sense of the term. All true religions were indeed more or less Islam in their original form and their adherents Muslims in the literal sense of the term, but not till the time when religion became complete in all its different aspects was it given the name of Al-Islam, which was reserved for the final Dispensation perfected in the Qur’an. The verse further explains 2:63.
3:86.
Important Words:
اسلام (complete submission) which is derived from اسلم which again is derived from سلم signifies: (1) complete submission to God; (2) the religion of Islam, the latter meaning being also based on the first-mentioned meaning (Taj). See also 2:113.
Commentary:
The verse throws light on the fact that though other religious systems also claim to inculcate belief in the Oneness of God and submission to His will, yet it is only in Islam, the religion brought by the Holy Prophet, that the idea of submission to God’s will has found its consummation; for complete submission requires complete manifestation of God’s attributes and it is in Islam alone that such manifestation has taken place. So Islam alone of all religious systems deserves to be called the religion of God in the real sense of the term. All true religions were indeed more or less Islam in their original form and their adherents Muslims in the literal sense of the term, but not till the time when religion became complete in all its different aspects was any faith given the name of Islam, which was reserved for the final dispensation perfected in the Quran.
The clause, And those who were given the Book did not disagree but after knowledge had come to them, out of mutual envy, signifies that if Jews and Christians had been truly submissive to the will of God, as they claim to be, they would not have refused to accept Islam, which is submission to Divine will in its completest and most perfect form. By their rejection of Islam they have brought ruin upon themselves and have been deprived of God’s grace and bounties of which they had had an ample share before.
e
3:86.
231
一切宗教都谆谆劝导信仰安拉的独一性, 并归顺他的意志。而只有在伊斯兰教中, 完全归顺安拉的思想才是完美的, 因为完全归顺必须彻底显现出安拉的常德, 而只有在伊斯兰教中才会有这种显现。因此在一切宗教体系中, 只有伊斯兰教才真正配得上称为安拉自己的宗教。实际上, 一切真正的宗教, 他们在原来的形式上多少都是具有伊斯兰教性质的, 而它们的信徒实在就是穆斯林。但是直到宗教在其一切不同的方面趋于完善的时候才取名为 اَلْاِسْلام (Al-Islam), 这个名字确是为了最后的教律而在 «古兰经» 中被保留下来的。此节经文进一步解释了2:63。
b
3:86.
311
Important Words:
اسلام (complete submission) which is derived from اسلم which again is derived from سلم signifies: (1) complete submission to God; (2) the religion of Islam, the latter meaning being also based on the first-mentioned meaning (Taj). See also 2:113.
Commentary:
The verse throws light on the fact that though other religious systems also claim to inculcate belief in the Oneness of God and submission to His will, yet it is only in Islam, the religion brought by the Holy Prophet, that the idea of submission to God’s will has found its consummation; for complete submission requires complete manifestation of God’s attributes and it is in Islam alone that such manifestation has taken place. So Islam alone of all religious systems deserves to be called the religion of God in the real sense of the term. All true religions were indeed more or less Islam in their original form and their adherents Muslims in the literal sense of the term, but not till the time when religion became complete in all its different aspects was any faith given the name of Islam, which was reserved for the final dispensation perfected in the Quran.
The clause, And those who were given the Book did not disagree but after knowledge had come to them, out of mutual envy, signifies that if Jews and Christians had been truly submissive to the will of God, as they claim to be, they would not have refused to accept Islam, which is submission to Divine will in its completest and most perfect form. By their rejection of Islam they have brought ruin upon themselves and have been deprived of God’s grace and bounties of which they had had an ample share before.
b
3:86.
383
All religions inculcate belief in the Oneness of God and submission to His Will, yet it is only in Islam that the idea of submission to God’s Will has found its consummation; for complete submission requires complete manifestation of God’s attributes and it is in Islam alone that such manifestation has taken place. So of all religious systems Islam alone deserves to be called God’s own religion in the real sense of the term. All true religions were indeed more or less Islam in their original form and their adherents Muslims in the literal sense of the term, but not till the time when religion became complete in all its different aspects was it given the name of Al-Islam, which was reserved for the final Dispensation perfected in the Qur’an. The verse further explains 2:63.
لَّا يَتَّخِذِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۖ وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ فَلَيْسَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ فِى شَىْءٍ إِلَّآ أَن تَتَّقُوا۟ مِنْهُمْ تُقَىٰةً ۗ وَيُحَذِّرُكُمُ ٱللَّهُ نَفْسَهُۥ ۗ وَإِلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْمَصِيرُ
3:119; 4:140, 145.
3:119; 4:140, 145.
With the accession of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, forging of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim State should enter into treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim State which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim States. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
Muslims are warned to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you guard yourselves fully against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning of which Muslims should always be on their guard.
Nafs means, a person’s self; purpose; will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab).
3:119; 4:140, 145.
Important Words:
نفسه (His punishment). نفس is the noun-infinitive from نفس (nafusa) which literally means, it was or became loved and highly esteemed. نفس به (nafisa) means, he was tenacious or niggardly of it. نفس means, the soul; the spirit; the mind; the body; a person or being; a person’s or being’s self; brother or relative, or one belonging to one’s own religion; purpose, will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
With the advent of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, the contracting of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim state should enter into any treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim state which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim states. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
The phrase, in preference to believers, means: (1) that Muslims should not form friendly relations with disbelievers in preference to believers, shunning the latter and seeking the former; (2) that they should not form any connection with disbelievers in a way that may harm the interests of Muslims. They are, however, free to contract friendly relations with such non-Muslims as are friendly to them, according to the exigencies of time and circumstances (60:9, 10).
The verse also instructs Muslims to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you cautiously guard against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning against which Muslims should always be on their guard.
The clause ویحذرکم الله نفسه rendered as And Allah cautions you against His punishment, may also be translated as "and Allah cautions or warns you concerning Himself", meaning that if you do not faithfully accept the guidance of God, and make friends with disbelievers in preference to believers, you will lose God, Who will in that case have no connection with you.
e
3:119; 4:140, 145.
a
3:119; 4:140, 145.
319
Important Words:
نفسه (His punishment). نفس is the noun-infinitive from نفس (nafusa) which literally means, it was or became loved and highly esteemed. نفس به (nafisa) means, he was tenacious or niggardly of it. نفس means, the soul; the spirit; the mind; the body; a person or being; a person’s or being’s self; brother or relative, or one belonging to one’s own religion; purpose, will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
With the advent of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, the contracting of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim state should enter into any treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim state which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim states. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
The phrase, in preference to believers, means: (1) that Muslims should not form friendly relations with disbelievers in preference to believers, shunning the latter and seeking the former; (2) that they should not form any connection with disbelievers in a way that may harm the interests of Muslims. They are, however, free to contract friendly relations with such non-Muslims as are friendly to them, according to the exigencies of time and circumstances (60:9, 10).
The verse also instructs Muslims to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you cautiously guard against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning against which Muslims should always be on their guard.
The clause ویحذرکم الله نفسه rendered as And Allah cautions you against His punishment, may also be translated as "and Allah cautions or warns you concerning Himself", meaning that if you do not faithfully accept the guidance of God, and make friends with disbelievers in preference to believers, you will lose God, Who will in that case have no connection with you.
a
3:119; 4:140, 145.
395
With the accession of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, forging of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim State should enter into treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim State which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim States. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
396
Muslims are warned to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you guard yourselves fully against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning of which Muslims should always be on their guard.
397
Nafs means, a person’s self; purpose; will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab).
وَمَن يَبْتَغِ غَيْرَ ٱلْإِسْلَٰمِ دِينًا فَلَن يُقْبَلَ مِنْهُ وَهُوَ فِى ٱلْءَاخِرَةِ مِنَ ٱلْخَٰسِرِينَ
3:20; 5:4.
3:20; 5:4.
3:20; 5:4.
Commentary:
The Jews and Christians used to say that they were not bound to accept Islam because it was the Quran that verified the Torah and the Gospel, and not the Torah and the Gospel that verified the Quran. Apart from the fact that the Quran does not "verify" the previous scriptures in the sense in which they understood it, their sense of false security has been shattered in this verse and it has been declared unequivocally that Islam is now the only religion acceptable to God. Even if the word اسلام (Islam) is here taken to signify not "the Religion of Islam" but "submission and resignation to the will of God", the present verse makes it binding on the People of the Book to accept Islam as it alone now represents the will of the Supreme Being.
b
3:20; 5:4.
a
3:20; 5:4.
374
Commentary:
The Jews and Christians used to say that they were not bound to accept Islam because it was the Quran that verified the Torah and the Gospel, and not the Torah and the Gospel that verified the Quran. Apart from the fact that the Quran does not "verify" the previous scriptures in the sense in which they understood it, their sense of false security has been shattered in this verse and it has been declared unequivocally that Islam is now the only religion acceptable to God. Even if the word اسلام (Islam) is here taken to signify not "the Religion of Islam" but "submission and resignation to the will of God", the present verse makes it binding on the People of the Book to accept Islam as it alone now represents the will of the Supreme Being.
b
3:20; 5:4.
فِيهِ ءَايَٰتٌۢ بَيِّنَٰتٌ مَّقَامُ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ ۖ وَمَن دَخَلَهُۥ كَانَ ءَامِنًا ۗ وَلِلَّهِ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ حِجُّ ٱلْبَيْتِ مَنِ ٱسْتَطَاعَ إِلَيْهِ سَبِيلًا ۚ وَمَن كَفَرَ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَنِىٌّ عَنِ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
2:126.
14:36; 28:58; 29:68.
22:28.
After alluding to the historical evidence in favour of the Ka‘bah, the Qur’an proceeds to adduce three reasons to show that the Ka‘bah is entitled to be adopted as the Qiblah or the Centre of God’s religion for all times: (a) Abraham, the great Patriarch prayed here; (b) it gives peace and security; (c) it shall ever remain the Centre to which men from different countries and diverse nations will resort for Pilgrimage.
2:126.
14:36; 28:58; 29:68.
22:28.
Commentary:
After alluding to the historical evidence in favour of the Ka‘bah, the Quran proceeds to state that reason also demands that the Ka‘bah should be adopted as the Qiblah. The verse gives reasons to show that the Ka‘bah is entitled to be adopted as the Qiblah or the centre of God’s religion.
The first reason, as hinted in the words, the place of Abraham, is that Abraham came and prayed here. Jews and Christians, to both of whom Abraham is worthy of great reverence, have to admit that Abraham visited the place. Therefore, it cannot be denied that it is a blessed place.
The second reason, referred to in the words whoso enters it enters peace, is that the Ka‘bah not only promises but also affords peace and security to those who enter it. This promise has been literally fulfilled. Temporally, God has ever protected it against wars and invasions both in ancient and modern times. The way in which Abrahah, ruler of Yemen, and his hosts were destroyed when they tried to invade the Ka‘bah and the way in which this territory, which then formed a part of the dominion of Turkey, was kept outside the conflict during the First World War (1914-18) afford remarkable instances of how miraculously God protects the Ka‘bah. Unlike the sacred places of other nations, it has never fallen into the hands of a people who would not revere it. Even in the Days of Ignorance when the different tribes of pagan Arabia were constantly at war with one another, the territory of the Ka‘bah was held to be sacred and no fighting was allowed therein. Spiritually, also, it is a place of security for those who enter it in the spiritual sense, i.e.embrace the religion of Islam. They become recipients of divine favours and enjoy security from the punishment of God.
The third reason which entitles the Ka‘bah to be adopted as the Qiblah is hinted at in the words, pilgrimage to the House is a duty which men…owe to God. The verse contains an implied promise on the part of God that the Ka‘bah shall ever continue to be the centre to which men of different countries and diverse nations will resort for Pilgrimage. The fulfilment of this promise is proof of the fact that the Ka‘bah has indeed been designed by God to be the Qiblah of all nations.
Every Muslim who can find a way to Mecca is bound to perform Pilgrimage to the Ka‘bah once in his lifetime. If he performs it more than once, it is regarded as a supererogatory act of devotion.
The words, who can find a way thither, embody three conditions: (1) one should have the necessary conveyance for performing the journey; (2) one should have the necessary money to bear the expenses; and (3) there should be peace and security on the way (Dawud). If a person is sick, he is supposed to have no "way" and Pilgrimage does not become obligatory on him.
The words, and whoever disbelieves (let him remember) that Allah is surely independent of all creatures, signify that whoever refuses to accept the Ka‘bah as the Qiblah, in spite of the arguments given in its favour, should remember that these commandments have been given for the good of man himself; so if he does not act upon them, he only harms himself and does no harm to God, Who is "Independent of all creatures".
The object of Pilgrimage is to accustom men to leave their home and country and suffer separation from relatives and friends for the sake of God. The Pilgrimage to Mecca is also a symbol of the respect shown to places where the will of God was specially manifested and a reminder of the incidents connected with that manifestation. It reminds believers of the long and hazardous journey of Abraham and Ishmael to the desert valley of Mecca and of Ishmael’s being left in that desert by Abraham; it tells them in speechless eloquence how those who make sacrifices in the way of God are protected and honoured by him; and it fosters their faith in the power and might of God. Again, the pilgrim, on finding himself near the place which has, from the beginning of the world, been dedicated to the worship of God, is sure to experience a peculiar spiritual association with those who have, through centuries, been bound together by the love and remembrance of God.
Beside this, the Pilgrimage to Mecca has great social and political significance; for Muslims from all parts of the world who meet here once a year can exchange views and establish and renew relations of love and brotherhood. They have opportunities of acquainting themselves with the problems that confront Muslims in different countries, of copying one another’s good points, profiting by one another’s experience and of cooperating with one another. It is, however, a matter of great regret that at present little advantage is being taken of this aspect of the Pilgrimage.
c
2:126.
d
14:36; 28:58; 29:68.
e
22:28.
263
在提及有利于天房的历史证据后, «古兰经» 接着列举三个原因来说明天房是有资格被选定为朝向的, 即那里在任何时候都是安拉的宗教中心: (a) 伟大的众圣之父, 伊布拉欣在此祈祷过; (b) 这里和平安全; (c) 它将永远是各国人民和不同的民族朝觐的中心。
b
2:126.
c
14:36; 28:58; 29:68.
d
22:28.
384
Commentary:
After alluding to the historical evidence in favour of the Ka‘bah, the Quran proceeds to state that reason also demands that the Ka‘bah should be adopted as the Qiblah. The verse gives reasons to show that the Ka‘bah is entitled to be adopted as the Qiblah or the centre of God’s religion.
The first reason, as hinted in the words, the place of Abraham, is that Abraham came and prayed here. Jews and Christians, to both of whom Abraham is worthy of great reverence, have to admit that Abraham visited the place. Therefore, it cannot be denied that it is a blessed place.
The second reason, referred to in the words whoso enters it enters peace, is that the Ka‘bah not only promises but also affords peace and security to those who enter it. This promise has been literally fulfilled. Temporally, God has ever protected it against wars and invasions both in ancient and modern times. The way in which Abrahah, ruler of Yemen, and his hosts were destroyed when they tried to invade the Ka‘bah and the way in which this territory, which then formed a part of the dominion of Turkey, was kept outside the conflict during the First World War (1914-18) afford remarkable instances of how miraculously God protects the Ka‘bah. Unlike the sacred places of other nations, it has never fallen into the hands of a people who would not revere it. Even in the Days of Ignorance when the different tribes of pagan Arabia were constantly at war with one another, the territory of the Ka‘bah was held to be sacred and no fighting was allowed therein. Spiritually, also, it is a place of security for those who enter it in the spiritual sense, i.e.embrace the religion of Islam. They become recipients of divine favours and enjoy security from the punishment of God.
The third reason which entitles the Ka‘bah to be adopted as the Qiblah is hinted at in the words, pilgrimage to the House is a duty which men…owe to God. The verse contains an implied promise on the part of God that the Ka‘bah shall ever continue to be the centre to which men of different countries and diverse nations will resort for Pilgrimage. The fulfilment of this promise is proof of the fact that the Ka‘bah has indeed been designed by God to be the Qiblah of all nations.
Every Muslim who can find a way to Mecca is bound to perform Pilgrimage to the Ka‘bah once in his lifetime. If he performs it more than once, it is regarded as a supererogatory act of devotion.
The words, who can find a way thither, embody three conditions: (1) one should have the necessary conveyance for performing the journey; (2) one should have the necessary money to bear the expenses; and (3) there should be peace and security on the way (Dawud). If a person is sick, he is supposed to have no "way" and Pilgrimage does not become obligatory on him.
The words, and whoever disbelieves (let him remember) that Allah is surely independent of all creatures, signify that whoever refuses to accept the Ka‘bah as the Qiblah, in spite of the arguments given in its favour, should remember that these commandments have been given for the good of man himself; so if he does not act upon them, he only harms himself and does no harm to God, Who is "Independent of all creatures".
The object of Pilgrimage is to accustom men to leave their home and country and suffer separation from relatives and friends for the sake of God. The Pilgrimage to Mecca is also a symbol of the respect shown to places where the will of God was specially manifested and a reminder of the incidents connected with that manifestation. It reminds believers of the long and hazardous journey of Abraham and Ishmael to the desert valley of Mecca and of Ishmael’s being left in that desert by Abraham; it tells them in speechless eloquence how those who make sacrifices in the way of God are protected and honoured by him; and it fosters their faith in the power and might of God. Again, the pilgrim, on finding himself near the place which has, from the beginning of the world, been dedicated to the worship of God, is sure to experience a peculiar spiritual association with those who have, through centuries, been bound together by the love and remembrance of God.
Beside this, the Pilgrimage to Mecca has great social and political significance; for Muslims from all parts of the world who meet here once a year can exchange views and establish and renew relations of love and brotherhood. They have opportunities of acquainting themselves with the problems that confront Muslims in different countries, of copying one another’s good points, profiting by one another’s experience and of cooperating with one another. It is, however, a matter of great regret that at present little advantage is being taken of this aspect of the Pilgrimage.
c
2:126.
d
14:36; 28:58; 29:68.
e
22:28.
444
After alluding to the historical evidence in favour of the Ka‘bah, the Qur’an proceeds to adduce three reasons to show that the Ka‘bah is entitled to be adopted as the Qiblah or the Centre of God’s religion for all times: (a) Abraham, the great Patriarch prayed here; (b) it gives peace and security; (c) it shall ever remain the Centre to which men from different countries and diverse nations will resort for Pilgrimage.
وَكَيْفَ تَكْفُرُونَ وَأَنتُمْ تُتْلَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ ءَايَٰتُ ٱللَّهِ وَفِيكُمْ رَسُولُهُۥ ۗ وَمَن يَعْتَصِم بِٱللَّهِ فَقَدْ هُدِىَ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ
4:147, 176.
(1) Whoever preserves himself from sin by acting upon God’s commandments; (2) whoever establishes a connection with Allah and cleaves firmly to Him.
4:147, 176.
Commentary:
The words, who holds fast to Allah, have two meanings: (1) whoever preserves himself from sin by acting on God’s commandments; (2) whoever connects himself with Allah and cleaves firmly to Him, thereby securing for himself an everlasting source of rise and progress.
c
4:147, 176.
265
(1) 任何奉行安拉的命谕而使自己不陷入罪恶的人; (2) 任何与安拉建立关系而又固执之者。
a
4:147, 176.
388
Commentary:
The words, who holds fast to Allah, have two meanings: (1) whoever preserves himself from sin by acting on God’s commandments; (2) whoever connects himself with Allah and cleaves firmly to Him, thereby securing for himself an everlasting source of rise and progress.
a
4:147, 176.
447
(1) Whoever preserves himself from sin by acting upon God’s commandments; (2) whoever establishes a connection with Allah and cleaves firmly to Him.
وَٱبْتَلُوا۟ ٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰ حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا بَلَغُوا۟ ٱلنِّكَاحَ فَإِنْ ءَانَسْتُم مِّنْهُمْ رُشْدًا فَٱدْفَعُوٓا۟ إِلَيْهِمْ أَمْوَٰلَهُمْ ۖ وَلَا تَأْكُلُوهَآ إِسْرَافًا وَبِدَارًا أَن يَكْبَرُوا۟ ۚ وَمَن كَانَ غَنِيًّا فَلْيَسْتَعْفِفْ ۖ وَمَن كَانَ فَقِيرًا فَلْيَأْكُلْ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۚ فَإِذَا دَفَعْتُمْ إِلَيْهِمْ أَمْوَٰلَهُمْ فَأَشْهِدُوا۟ عَلَيْهِمْ ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ حَسِيبًا
Under no circumstances should the property of the orphans be made over to them before they attain puberty and are so mature of intellect as to take care of and properly manage it.
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian, if he is poor, is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses as the word "presence" hints.
Commentary:
Guardians of orphans are enjoined to continue to test them so that if, after having reached the age of puberty, which according to some authorities is 18 years, and according to others 21, they are found to be capable of taking charge of their property, it should be handed over to them. But in no circumstances is it to be made over to them before puberty is attained and before they are so mature of intellect as to take care of and manage their property. If even at the mature age of 18 or 21, they are found to be incapable of managing their property, it may be withheld from them for a further period, with the sanction of the State.
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, if he is poor, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
But if the guardian is a person of ample means, he should take nothing out of the orphan’s property. In that case, his should be a labour of love, done in hope of reward from God. This verse is not a repetition, but an explanation of 4:3 which contains a prohibitory injunction for such guardians as possess sufficient income with the addition that it allows a certain remuneration for guardians of meagre means.
The words, when you deliver to them their property, then take witnesses in their presence, have been added as a safeguard against all possible frauds as well as misunderstanding. The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses when both the wards and the witnesses are present, as the word "presence" hints.
The verse ends with a stern warning in the words, Allah is sufficient as a Reckoner. So all concerned should fear the All-Seeing and All-Knowing God. Indeed, the fear of being called to account before God is the only true basis of all righteousness and the real and most effective preventive against sin and iniquity. One should fear not only the punishment of God, but also losing His love and mercy.
489
Commentary:
Guardians of orphans are enjoined to continue to test them so that if, after having reached the age of puberty, which according to some authorities is 18 years, and according to others 21, they are found to be capable of taking charge of their property, it should be handed over to them. But in no circumstances is it to be made over to them before puberty is attained and before they are so mature of intellect as to take care of and manage their property. If even at the mature age of 18 or 21, they are found to be incapable of managing their property, it may be withheld from them for a further period, with the sanction of the State.
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, if he is poor, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
But if the guardian is a person of ample means, he should take nothing out of the orphan’s property. In that case, his should be a labour of love, done in hope of reward from God. This verse is not a repetition, but an explanation of 4:3 which contains a prohibitory injunction for such guardians as possess sufficient income with the addition that it allows a certain remuneration for guardians of meagre means.
The words, when you deliver to them their property, then take witnesses in their presence, have been added as a safeguard against all possible frauds as well as misunderstanding. The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses when both the wards and the witnesses are present, as the word "presence" hints.
The verse ends with a stern warning in the words, Allah is sufficient as a Reckoner. So all concerned should fear the All-Seeing and All-Knowing God. Indeed, the fear of being called to account before God is the only true basis of all righteousness and the real and most effective preventive against sin and iniquity. One should fear not only the punishment of God, but also losing His love and mercy.
567
Under no circumstances should the property of the orphans be made over to them before they attain puberty and are so mature of intellect as to take care of and properly manage it.
568
The verse also warns guardians not to squander away in haste the money of their wards before they are old enough to take charge of it. The guardian, if he is poor, is, however, allowed a reasonable wage, which should be in proportion to the amount of work he does and to the value of the ward’s property.
569
The property should be handed over to the wards in the presence of reliable witnesses as the word "presence" hints.
وَٱلَّذِينَ إِذَا فَعَلُوا۟ فَٰحِشَةً أَوْ ظَلَمُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُمْ ذَكَرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ فَٱسْتَغْفَرُوا۟ لِذُنُوبِهِمْ وَمَن يَغْفِرُ ٱلذُّنُوبَ إِلَّا ٱللَّهُ وَلَمْ يُصِرُّوا۟ عَلَىٰ مَا فَعَلُوا۟ وَهُمْ يَعْلَمُونَ
7:202.
14:11; 39:54; 61:13.
When good men happen to be guilty of a moral lapse, they do not seek to justify their conduct but frankly confess their guilt, and try to reform.
7:202.
14:11; 39:54; 61:13.
Commentary:
This verse embodies a refutation of the Christian doctrine of Atonement. The words remember Allah, mean that righteous persons are at once reminded of Allah whenever they happen to commit a sin. As a matter of fact though even good men may occasionally fall into sin, their hearts are not dead and they are always ready to repent. So if they happen to commit a sin, it is due only to a temporary lapse, and not because they love to indulge in sin. Thus so long as a man "remembers God" immediately after he commits a sin and feels sincere remorse and compunction at his evil deed, there is always time for his repentance to be accepted. But when he goes of sinning until he loses all sense of sin and ceases to feel compunction and remorse at his evil deeds, he loses the power to repent and is doomed, unless God should work some special change in him.
The words, and who can forgive sins except Allah? have been introduced as a parenthetical clause to exhort sinners to repent. They are not made to repent through fear, but by being reminded of Divine forgiveness. When God is Gracious and Forgiving, why should not man repent?
The words, do not persist knowingly, imply that whenever good men happen to commit an error, they do not try to justify their conduct, but frankly admit their mistake and then reform themselves. The verse does not, however, mean that a man should confess his sins to others. What is meant is that one should confess one’s guilt to oneself, i.e. one should feel that one has been in the wrong and should not proceed to defend one’s conduct when someone else, or, for that matter, when one’s own conscience reproaches one for one’s misdeeds. Those truly righteous never try to deceive themselves.
d
7:202.
e
14:11; 39:54; 61:13.
a
7:202.
b
14:11; 39:54; 61:13.
419
Commentary:
This verse embodies a refutation of the Christian doctrine of Atonement. The words remember Allah, mean that righteous persons are at once reminded of Allah whenever they happen to commit a sin. As a matter of fact though even good men may occasionally fall into sin, their hearts are not dead and they are always ready to repent. So if they happen to commit a sin, it is due only to a temporary lapse, and not because they love to indulge in sin. Thus so long as a man "remembers God" immediately after he commits a sin and feels sincere remorse and compunction at his evil deed, there is always time for his repentance to be accepted. But when he goes of sinning until he loses all sense of sin and ceases to feel compunction and remorse at his evil deeds, he loses the power to repent and is doomed, unless God should work some special change in him.
The words, and who can forgive sins except Allah? have been introduced as a parenthetical clause to exhort sinners to repent. They are not made to repent through fear, but by being reminded of Divine forgiveness. When God is Gracious and Forgiving, why should not man repent?
The words, do not persist knowingly, imply that whenever good men happen to commit an error, they do not try to justify their conduct, but frankly admit their mistake and then reform themselves. The verse does not, however, mean that a man should confess his sins to others. What is meant is that one should confess one’s guilt to oneself, i.e. one should feel that one has been in the wrong and should not proceed to defend one’s conduct when someone else, or, for that matter, when one’s own conscience reproaches one for one’s misdeeds. Those truly righteous never try to deceive themselves.
a
7:202.
b
14:11; 39:54; 61:13.
482
When good men happen to be guilty of a moral lapse, they do not seek to justify their conduct but frankly confess their guilt, and try to reform.
وَمَا مُحَمَّدٌ إِلَّا رَسُولٌ قَدْ خَلَتْ مِن قَبْلِهِ ٱلرُّسُلُ ۚ أَفَإِي۟ن مَّاتَ أَوْ قُتِلَ ٱنقَلَبْتُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ ۚ وَمَن يَنقَلِبْ عَلَىٰ عَقِبَيْهِ فَلَن يَضُرَّ ٱللَّهَ شَيْـًٔا ۗ وَسَيَجْزِى ٱللَّهُ ٱلشَّٰكِرِينَ
5:76.
2:144, 218; 5:55; 47:39.
吴候德流传着一个错误的消息--------穆圣已经被害。这节经文提到了那件事, 大意是说, 虽然这一传闻是不真实的, 然而纵使它是真实的, 穆圣确已被害, 信者也不应动摇他们的信仰。穆罕默德仅是一位先知; 正如他以前的先知都已死去, 他也会死去。但是伊斯兰教的安拉是永生的。有记录说, 当穆圣去世的 时候, 欧麦尔站在麦地那的清真寺内, 手中握着出鞘的剑说: “谁要说穆圣死了, 我将砍下他的头。他没有死, 而是到他的养主那儿去了 (他已升天), 正如穆撒已到养主那儿, 他将回来, 惩罚伪善者。”阿布伯克尔来到现场, 断然吩咐欧麦尔坐下, 对聚集在清真寺的穆斯林演说, 朗诵了这节经文, 使他们相信穆圣确实已死, 所以他们伤心已极。本节经文附带证实了这个事实: 穆圣之前的所有先知都已逝世。因为如果任何一个先知还活着的话, 本节经文就不能作为穆圣逝去的证据而加以引证。事实上伊斯兰教不靠任何伟人作为其存在的支柱。安拉是其启示者、防御者和保护者。但不应以为此节经文意味着穆圣会死在战争中或死于凶手之手。他受许得到主佑, 使生命免遭一切伤害 (5:68)。穆圣死亡这个捏造的传闻传开时, 敌人十分高兴。但结果穆斯林祸中得福。这为他们对穆圣以后确实逝世带给他们的过重精神负担作了思想准备。但这个经历证明, 这对他们来说是承受不住的。
5:76.
2:144, 218; 5:55; 47:39.
A false report was spread at Uhud that the Holy Prophet had been killed. The verse refers to that incident and purports to say that although the report was untrue, yet even if it had been true and the Prophet had in fact been killed, that should not have made the Faithful waver in their faith. Muhammad was only a Prophet; and as other Prophets before him had died, so would he. But the God of Islam is Ever Living. It is on record that when the Holy Prophet died, ‘Umar stood up in the Mosque at Medina with a drawn sword in his hand and said, "Whoever will say that the Prophet of God is dead, I will cut off his head. He is not dead, but has gone to his Lord (he has ascended to heaven), even as Moses had gone to his Lord, and he would come back and punish the Hypocrites." Abu Bakr coming on the scene firmly told ‘Umar to sit down and addressing the Muslims who had gathered in the Mosque, recited this very verse which convinced them that the Prophet was really dead and so they were overwhelmed with grief. T
5:76.
2:144, 218; 5:55; 47:39.
Commentary:
As already mentioned (3:122), the false report was spread at Uhud that the Holy Prophet was killed. The verse refers to this incident and purports to say that although the report about the death of the Prophet was untrue, yet even if it had been true, that should not have made the Faithful waver in their faith. Muhammad was only a Prophet; and as other Prophets before him had died, so would he. But the God of Islam ever lives.
It is also on record that when, seven years later, the Holy Prophet died, ‘Umar stood up in the Mosque at Medina with a drawn sword in his hand, and said, "Whoever will say that the Prophet of God is dead, I will cut off his head. He is not dead, but has gone to his Lord, (i.e. he has ascended to heaven) even as Moses had gone to his Lord, and he would come back and punish the hypocrites." At this stage, Abu Bakr, who happened to be away at the time of the Prophet’s death, hurriedly came back, went straight into the Prophet’s chamber and, seeing that he was really dead, kissed his forehead, saying, "Sweet art thou in death as thou wert in life, and surely God will not bring on thee two deaths." Then he came out, strong and firm, asked ‘Umar to sit down and, addressing the Companions, who were gathered in the Mosque, recited to them this very verse, i.e. Muhammad is only a Messenger; verily all Messengers have passed away before him; if then he die or be slain, will you turn back on your heels? meaning, that in the circumstances it was no wonder that the Holy Prophet also had passed away. Hearing this timely recital, ‘Umar, and all others, were convinced of the death of the Holy Prophet and were overpowered with grief. Thus, the verse incidentally proves that the Prophets that lived before the Holy Prophet had all died; for if any of them had been alive, the verse could not have been quoted as proof of the Holy Prophet’s death.
The verse also negates the idea that any Prophet has risen to heaven; for it was used to falsify ‘Umar’s contention to the effect that the Holy Prophet was not dead but had risen to heaven. The verse thus proves, without a shadow of doubt, that Jesus too, who was one of the Prophets that had appeared before the Holy Prophet, is not physically alive in the heavens, as some present-day Muslims, following the Christian belief, erroneously think. He is certainly dead, as proved by this verse and the consensus of the Companions’ opinion on the occasion of the death of the Holy Prophet.
In fact, religion does not depend on any personality. It belongs to God alone. That is why the Quran says that if the Holy Prophet dies or is killed, it will be no ground for Muslims to turn away from Islam; for the Prophet is only a Messenger and the religion is God’s. Elsewhere, however, the Quran clearly says: And Allah will protect thee from men(5:68). These two verses are not at variance with each other. What the Quran intends to emphasize in the verse is the fundamental truth of Islamic teachings. Muslims had seen how pure and true these teachings were. Their truth was evident and they could not have become false even if the Holy Prophet had been slain. For instance, the fundamental teaching of Islam is the Unity of God. Now, this truth could not become an untruth if the Prophet were killed. But apart from this announcement in principle, the Prophet could not be killed, for God had definitely promised to protect him.
It should also be remembered that immunity from being murdered is not given in the Quran as a criterion of a Prophet’s truth. People are required to accept a Prophet in his lifetime, and, therefore, they must have proofs of his truth in his lifetime, so that, by witnessing them, they may believe in him. They cannot wait till the time of his death in order to know whether he is a true or a false claimant.
Once a Prophet has furnished clear proofs of his truth in his lifetime, his claim is established and nothing can undo those proofs. Only if a Prophet were murdered before he had been able to give any proof of his truth could we conclude that he had proved a failure and was not a true claimant. But such a thing has never happened.
The enemy rejoiced when the report went round that the Prophet had been slain, but that supposed death of the Prophet turned out to be the veritable "life" of Islam. It fulfilled a great purpose. It prepared Muslims for the actual passing of the Holy Prophet. If this event had not occurred, the death of the Holy Prophet would have proved an unbearable trial for Muslims. In fact, this painful experience brought in disguise many blessings for Islam. At the Battle of Uhud, it brought to light the unshakable faith of the believers; at the time of his death it served to save Islam from going to pieces; and now that Islam is to all appearances dead, it is serving as a means of breathing new life into it, by proving that Jesus, whom Christians have deified, is dead, like all other Prophets that lived before Islam.
b
5:76.
c
2:144, 218; 5:55; 47:39.
283
吴候德流传着一个错误的消息--------穆圣已经被害。这节经文提到了那件事, 大意是说, 虽然这一传闻是不真实的, 然而纵使它是真实的, 穆圣确已被害, 信者也不应动摇他们的信仰。穆罕默德仅是一位先知; 正如他以前的先知都已死去, 他也会死去。但是伊斯兰教的安拉是永生的。有记录说, 当穆圣去世的 时候, 欧麦尔站在麦地那的清真寺内, 手中握着出鞘的剑说: “谁要说穆圣死了, 我将砍下他的头。他没有死, 而是到他的养主那儿去了 (他已升天), 正如穆撒已到养主那儿, 他将回来, 惩罚伪善者。”阿布伯克尔来到现场, 断然吩咐欧麦尔坐下, 对聚集在清真寺的穆斯林演说, 朗诵了这节经文, 使他们相信穆圣确实已死, 所以他们伤心已极。本节经文附带证实了这个事实: 穆圣之前的所有先知都已逝世。因为如果任何一个先知还活着的话, 本节经文就不能作为穆圣逝去的证据而加以引证。事实上伊斯兰教不靠任何伟人作为其存在的支柱。安拉是其启示者、防御者和保护者。但不应以为此节经文意味着穆圣会死在战争中或死于凶手之手。他受许得到主佑, 使生命免遭一切伤害 (5:68)。穆圣死亡这个捏造的传闻传开时, 敌人十分高兴。但结果穆斯林祸中得福。这为他们对穆圣以后确实逝世带给他们的过重精神负担作了思想准备。但这个经历证明, 这对他们来说是承受不住的。
a
5:76.
b
2:144, 218; 5:55; 47:39.
428
Commentary:
As already mentioned (3:122), the false report was spread at Uhud that the Holy Prophet was killed. The verse refers to this incident and purports to say that although the report about the death of the Prophet was untrue, yet even if it had been true, that should not have made the Faithful waver in their faith. Muhammad was only a Prophet; and as other Prophets before him had died, so would he. But the God of Islam ever lives.
It is also on record that when, seven years later, the Holy Prophet died, ‘Umar stood up in the Mosque at Medina with a drawn sword in his hand, and said, "Whoever will say that the Prophet of God is dead, I will cut off his head. He is not dead, but has gone to his Lord, (i.e. he has ascended to heaven) even as Moses had gone to his Lord, and he would come back and punish the hypocrites." At this stage, Abu Bakr, who happened to be away at the time of the Prophet’s death, hurriedly came back, went straight into the Prophet’s chamber and, seeing that he was really dead, kissed his forehead, saying, "Sweet art thou in death as thou wert in life, and surely God will not bring on thee two deaths." Then he came out, strong and firm, asked ‘Umar to sit down and, addressing the Companions, who were gathered in the Mosque, recited to them this very verse, i.e. Muhammad is only a Messenger; verily all Messengers have passed away before him; if then he die or be slain, will you turn back on your heels? meaning, that in the circumstances it was no wonder that the Holy Prophet also had passed away. Hearing this timely recital, ‘Umar, and all others, were convinced of the death of the Holy Prophet and were overpowered with grief. Thus, the verse incidentally proves that the Prophets that lived before the Holy Prophet had all died; for if any of them had been alive, the verse could not have been quoted as proof of the Holy Prophet’s death.
The verse also negates the idea that any Prophet has risen to heaven; for it was used to falsify ‘Umar’s contention to the effect that the Holy Prophet was not dead but had risen to heaven. The verse thus proves, without a shadow of doubt, that Jesus too, who was one of the Prophets that had appeared before the Holy Prophet, is not physically alive in the heavens, as some present-day Muslims, following the Christian belief, erroneously think. He is certainly dead, as proved by this verse and the consensus of the Companions’ opinion on the occasion of the death of the Holy Prophet.
In fact, religion does not depend on any personality. It belongs to God alone. That is why the Quran says that if the Holy Prophet dies or is killed, it will be no ground for Muslims to turn away from Islam; for the Prophet is only a Messenger and the religion is God’s. Elsewhere, however, the Quran clearly says: And Allah will protect thee from men(5:68). These two verses are not at variance with each other. What the Quran intends to emphasize in the verse is the fundamental truth of Islamic teachings. Muslims had seen how pure and true these teachings were. Their truth was evident and they could not have become false even if the Holy Prophet had been slain. For instance, the fundamental teaching of Islam is the Unity of God. Now, this truth could not become an untruth if the Prophet were killed. But apart from this announcement in principle, the Prophet could not be killed, for God had definitely promised to protect him.
It should also be remembered that immunity from being murdered is not given in the Quran as a criterion of a Prophet’s truth. People are required to accept a Prophet in his lifetime, and, therefore, they must have proofs of his truth in his lifetime, so that, by witnessing them, they may believe in him. They cannot wait till the time of his death in order to know whether he is a true or a false claimant.
Once a Prophet has furnished clear proofs of his truth in his lifetime, his claim is established and nothing can undo those proofs. Only if a Prophet were murdered before he had been able to give any proof of his truth could we conclude that he had proved a failure and was not a true claimant. But such a thing has never happened.
The enemy rejoiced when the report went round that the Prophet had been slain, but that supposed death of the Prophet turned out to be the veritable "life" of Islam. It fulfilled a great purpose. It prepared Muslims for the actual passing of the Holy Prophet. If this event had not occurred, the death of the Holy Prophet would have proved an unbearable trial for Muslims. In fact, this painful experience brought in disguise many blessings for Islam. At the Battle of Uhud, it brought to light the unshakable faith of the believers; at the time of his death it served to save Islam from going to pieces; and now that Islam is to all appearances dead, it is serving as a means of breathing new life into it, by proving that Jesus, whom Christians have deified, is dead, like all other Prophets that lived before Islam.
a
5:76.
b
2:144, 218; 5:55; 47:39.
494
A false report was spread at Uhud that the Holy Prophet had been killed. The verse refers to that incident and purports to say that although the report was untrue, yet even if it had been true and the Prophet had in fact been killed, that should not have made the Faithful waver in their faith. Muhammad was only a Prophet; and as other Prophets before him had died, so would he. But the God of Islam is Ever Living. It is on record that when the Holy Prophet died, ‘Umar stood up in the Mosque at Medina with a drawn sword in his hand and said, "Whoever will say that the Prophet of God is dead, I will cut off his head. He is not dead, but has gone to his Lord (he has ascended to heaven), even as Moses had gone to his Lord, and he would come back and punish the Hypocrites." Abu Bakr coming on the scene firmly told ‘Umar to sit down and addressing the Muslims who had gathered in the Mosque, recited this very verse which convinced them that the Prophet was really dead and so they were overwhelmed with grief. T
وَمَا كَانَ لِنَفْسٍ أَن تَمُوتَ إِلَّا بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ كِتَٰبًا مُّؤَجَّلًا ۗ وَمَن يُرِدْ ثَوَابَ ٱلدُّنْيَا نُؤْتِهِۦ مِنْهَا وَمَن يُرِدْ ثَوَابَ ٱلْءَاخِرَةِ نُؤْتِهِۦ مِنْهَا ۚ وَسَنَجْزِى ٱلشَّٰكِرِينَ
3:149; 4:135; 42:21.
3:149; 4:135; 42:21.
3:149; 4:135; 42:21.
Commentary:
The preceding verse spoke of the possible death of the Holy Prophet. But that was mentioned only as a matter of principle. Otherwise, how could the Holy Prophet, whom God had promised to protect, die except by His leave? Whenever death comes, it comes with the permission of God; but that permission could not be yet given in the case of the Holy Prophet. There is a fixed time for it and the enmity or the secret machinations of disbelievers could not hasten that time.
a
3:149; 4:135; 42:21.
a
3:149; 4:135; 42:21.
429
Commentary:
The preceding verse spoke of the possible death of the Holy Prophet. But that was mentioned only as a matter of principle. Otherwise, how could the Holy Prophet, whom God had promised to protect, die except by His leave? Whenever death comes, it comes with the permission of God; but that permission could not be yet given in the case of the Holy Prophet. There is a fixed time for it and the enmity or the secret machinations of disbelievers could not hasten that time.
a
3:149; 4:135; 42:21.
وَمَا كَانَ لِنَبِىٍّ أَن يَغُلَّ ۚ وَمَن يَغْلُلْ يَأْتِ بِمَا غَلَّ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ ۚ ثُمَّ تُوَفَّىٰ كُلُّ نَفْسٍ مَّا كَسَبَتْ وَهُمْ لَا يُظْلَمُونَ
3:26; 14:52; 40:18.
穆圣在吴候德山布置射手来保护穆斯林军队的后方, 当他们看到麦加军队全面逃离时就离开岗位 (不是全部)。他们认为在那个阶段离开吴候德山不会违背穆圣的命令的精神。其实, 命令的内容是在任何情况下他们都不应离开岗位。他们进而认为, 因为根据阿拉伯习俗, 在作战期间一个士兵有权占有所抓住的战利品, 所以如果他们坚守岗位, 他们可能失去享有的战利品。射手们的这种轻率行动暗示他们的这种见解: 穆圣可能忽视他们占有战利品的权利。这里要谴责的正是这种见解。但不含有责怪他们对穆圣真有不忠的意思。本节经文大意只是说, 并不是穆圣忽视那些他亲自布置在某地的人占有战利品的权利的。
3:26; 14:52; 40:18.
The archers stationed by the Holy Prophet at the hill of Uhud to protect the rear of the Muslim army left their posts (not all of them) when they saw the Meccan army in full flight. They thought that by leaving the hill at that stage they were not contravening the spirit of the Prophet’s orders, which were to the effect that they were not to leave their posts in any circumstances. They further thought that as, according to Arab custom a soldier was entitled to the possession of the booty he laid his hand on during the fight they might be deprived of their share of the spoils of war if they stuck to their posts. This precipitate action of the archers implied an apprehension on their part that the Holy Prophet might ignore their right to the booty. It is this apprehension that is condemned here. But no imputation of actual faithlessness to the Holy Prophet is implied. The verse simply purports to say that it was far from the Holy Prophet to ignore the rights to the booty of those whom he himself had statio
3:26; 14:52; 40:18.
Commentary:
The verse can be interpreted in two ways. The archers stationed by the Holy Prophet at the mount of Uhud to protect the rear of the Muslim army left their post when they saw the Meccan army in full flight. They thought that by leaving the mount at that stage they would not be contravening the spirit of the Prophet’s orders, which were to the effect that they were not to leave their post in any circumstances. They further thought that as, according to Arab custom, a soldier was entitled to the possession of the booty he laid his hand on during the fight, they might be deprived of their share of the spoils of war if they stuck to their post. This precipitate action of the archers implied an apprehension on their part that the Prophet might ignore their right to the booty and might thus prove faithless to them. It is this apprehension that the verse condemns in the words, And it is not possible for a Prophet to act dishonestly. But no imputation of actual faithlessness to the Holy Prophet is implied. The verse simply purports to say that it was far from the Prophet to ignore the rights to the booty of those whom he himself had stationed at a certain place.
The verse may also be taken as a rebuke to the hypocrites who deserted the Holy Prophet in the Battle of Uhud. In this case, the implication would be that while the hypocrites had proved faithless to the Prophet by leaving him in the lurch, the Prophet would not prove faithless to God by refusing to fight in His cause even when weak and deserted. This meaning is also supported by the context.
a
3:26; 14:52; 40:18.
288
穆圣在吴候德山布置射手来保护穆斯林军队的后方, 当他们看到麦加军队全面逃离时就离开岗位 (不是全部)。他们认为在那个阶段离开吴候德山不会违背穆圣的命令的精神。其实, 命令的内容是在任何情况下他们都不应离开岗位。他们进而认为, 因为根据阿拉伯习俗, 在作战期间一个士兵有权占有所抓住的战利品, 所以如果他们坚守岗位, 他们可能失去享有的战利品。射手们的这种轻率行动暗示他们的这种见解: 穆圣可能忽视他们占有战利品的权利。这里要谴责的正是这种见解。但不含有责怪他们对穆圣真有不忠的意思。本节经文大意只是说, 并不是穆圣忽视那些他亲自布置在某地的人占有战利品的权利的。
a
3:26; 14:52; 40:18.
444
Commentary:
The verse can be interpreted in two ways. The archers stationed by the Holy Prophet at the mount of Uhud to protect the rear of the Muslim army left their post when they saw the Meccan army in full flight. They thought that by leaving the mount at that stage they would not be contravening the spirit of the Prophet’s orders, which were to the effect that they were not to leave their post in any circumstances. They further thought that as, according to Arab custom, a soldier was entitled to the possession of the booty he laid his hand on during the fight, they might be deprived of their share of the spoils of war if they stuck to their post. This precipitate action of the archers implied an apprehension on their part that the Prophet might ignore their right to the booty and might thus prove faithless to them. It is this apprehension that the verse condemns in the words, And it is not possible for a Prophet to act dishonestly. But no imputation of actual faithlessness to the Holy Prophet is implied. The verse simply purports to say that it was far from the Prophet to ignore the rights to the booty of those whom he himself had stationed at a certain place.
The verse may also be taken as a rebuke to the hypocrites who deserted the Holy Prophet in the Battle of Uhud. In this case, the implication would be that while the hypocrites had proved faithless to the Prophet by leaving him in the lurch, the Prophet would not prove faithless to God by refusing to fight in His cause even when weak and deserted. This meaning is also supported by the context.
a
3:26; 14:52; 40:18.
517
The archers stationed by the Holy Prophet at the hill of Uhud to protect the rear of the Muslim army left their posts (not all of them) when they saw the Meccan army in full flight. They thought that by leaving the hill at that stage they were not contravening the spirit of the Prophet’s orders, which were to the effect that they were not to leave their posts in any circumstances. They further thought that as, according to Arab custom a soldier was entitled to the possession of the booty he laid his hand on during the fight they might be deprived of their share of the spoils of war if they stuck to their posts. This precipitate action of the archers implied an apprehension on their part that the Holy Prophet might ignore their right to the booty. It is this apprehension that is condemned here. But no imputation of actual faithlessness to the Holy Prophet is implied. The verse simply purports to say that it was far from the Holy Prophet to ignore the rights to the booty of those whom he himself had statio
وَمَن يَعْمَلْ سُوٓءًا أَوْ يَظْلِمْ نَفْسَهُۥ ثُمَّ يَسْتَغْفِرِ ٱللَّهَ يَجِدِ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
4:65.
4:65.
4:65.
Commentary:
The God of Islam is a God of mercy and is never revengeful. Whenever a servant of His commits a sin or does an evil act and then sincerely repents and asks for His forgiveness, he always finds Him most Forgiving and Merciful. Ah, what a loving God! Truly has the Holy Prophet said that the joy of God at the repentance of a sinful servant of His is greater than the joy of a lonely wayfarer who, while travelling in the desert, loses his camel laden with provisions and despairs of life but then suddenly finds it (Bukhari, ch. on Da‘wat).
b
4:65.
a
4:65.
578
Commentary:
The God of Islam is a God of mercy and is never revengeful. Whenever a servant of His commits a sin or does an evil act and then sincerely repents and asks for His forgiveness, he always finds Him most Forgiving and Merciful. Ah, what a loving God! Truly has the Holy Prophet said that the joy of God at the repentance of a sinful servant of His is greater than the joy of a lonely wayfarer who, while travelling in the desert, loses his camel laden with provisions and despairs of life but then suddenly finds it (Bukhari, ch. on Da‘wat).
a
4:65.
وَمَن يَكْسِبْ إِثْمًا فَإِنَّمَا يَكْسِبُهُۥ عَلَىٰ نَفْسِهِۦ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
2:287; 99:9.
اصل لفظ کَسَبَ ہے جس کے معنے کمانے کے ہیں۔ لیکن یہ لفظ عربی میں کسی فعل کے ایسے طور پر کرنے کے لئے بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے جسے بالارادہ کیا جائے۔ گو اس کے نتیجہ کی امیدنہ ہو۔ اردو میں اس کا ترجمہ ’’کمانا‘‘ کرنا محاورہ کے خلاف ہے۔ اس لئے ’’کرے‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن مراد ایسے طور پر کام کرنا ہے کہ ارادہ شامل ہو اور نتیجہ کی توقع یا خوف نہ ہو۔
2:287; 99:9.
2:287; 99:9.
c
2:287; 99:9.
1
اصل لفظ کَسَبَ ہے جس کے معنے کمانے کے ہیں۔ لیکن یہ لفظ عربی میں کسی فعل کے ایسے طور پر کرنے کے لئے بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے جسے بالارادہ کیا جائے۔ گو اس کے نتیجہ کی امیدنہ ہو۔ اردو میں اس کا ترجمہ ’’کمانا‘‘ کرنا محاورہ کے خلاف ہے۔ اس لئے ’’کرے‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن مراد ایسے طور پر کام کرنا ہے کہ ارادہ شامل ہو اور نتیجہ کی توقع یا خوف نہ ہو۔
b
2:287; 99:9.
b
2:287; 99:9.
وَمَن يَكْسِبْ خَطِيٓـَٔةً أَوْ إِثْمًا ثُمَّ يَرْمِ بِهِۦ بَرِيٓـًٔا فَقَدِ ٱحْتَمَلَ بُهْتَٰنًا وَإِثْمًا مُّبِينًا
24:2, 24; 33:59.
خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) (过错) 和 اِثْم (Ithm) (罪恶) 在这节经文中同时谈及。它们的区别是, 前者可能是有意和无意的, 而且常常只限于行为者本身; 而后者是有
意的, 而它的范围可能涉及其他人。而且, 前者可以意指对安拉玩忽职责, 而后者常常是既触犯安拉又触犯他人, 因此, 更为严重而应受比前者更大的惩罚。请看 2:82 和 2:174。如果犯了过错或罪恶的人试图归咎无辜, 其犯错误或罪恶的严重性倍增。这就是为什么这样的企图不仅叫做 بُهْتَانْ (Buhtan) (诽谤), 也叫做 اِثْمُ مُبِيْن (Ithmu Mubin) (明显罪恶)。
24:2, 24; 33:59.
The difference between Khati’ah (fault) and Ithm (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer, while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may signify a dereliction of duty due to God, but the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and is deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174. The commission of a fault or a sin makes it doubly grave, if the offender tries to shift the blame to an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has been termed not only as Buhtan (calumny) but also as Ithmun Mubin (manifest sin).
24:12, 24; 33:59.
Important Words:
The difference between خطیئة (fault) and اثم (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer; while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may be a dereliction of duty due to God; while the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174.
Commentary:
The commission of a fault or sin makes it doubly grave, if he who commits it tries to fix it on an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has not only been termed بھتان (calumny) but also اثم مبین (manifest sin). As the word مبین (manifest) also means "that which cuts asunder" (2:169), the expression اثما مبینا may also signify that a double sin, (i.e. committing a sin and then imputing it to an innocent person) is that which is likely to cut asunder the connection of the sinner with his Maker.
d
24:2, 24; 33:59.
344
خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) (过错) 和 اِثْم (Ithm) (罪恶) 在这节经文中同时谈及。它们的区别是, 前者可能是有意和无意的, 而且常常只限于行为者本身; 而后者是有
意的, 而它的范围可能涉及其他人。而且, 前者可以意指对安拉玩忽职责, 而后者常常是既触犯安拉又触犯他人, 因此, 更为严重而应受比前者更大的惩罚。请看 2:82 和 2:174。如果犯了过错或罪恶的人试图归咎无辜, 其犯错误或罪恶的严重性倍增。这就是为什么这样的企图不仅叫做 بُهْتَانْ (Buhtan) (诽谤), 也叫做 اِثْمُ مُبِيْن (Ithmu Mubin) (明显罪恶)。
c
24:12, 24; 33:59.
579
Important Words:
The difference between خطیئة (fault) and اثم (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer; while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may be a dereliction of duty due to God; while the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174.
Commentary:
The commission of a fault or sin makes it doubly grave, if he who commits it tries to fix it on an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has not only been termed بھتان (calumny) but also اثم مبین (manifest sin). As the word مبین (manifest) also means "that which cuts asunder" (2:169), the expression اثما مبینا may also signify that a double sin, (i.e. committing a sin and then imputing it to an innocent person) is that which is likely to cut asunder the connection of the sinner with his Maker.
c
24:2, 24; 33:59.
667
The difference between Khati’ah (fault) and Ithm (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer, while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may signify a dereliction of duty due to God, but the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and is deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174. The commission of a fault or a sin makes it doubly grave, if the offender tries to shift the blame to an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has been termed not only as Buhtan (calumny) but also as Ithmun Mubin (manifest sin).
تِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَمَن يُطِعِ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ يُدْخِلْهُ جَنَّٰتٍ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَا ۚ وَذَٰلِكَ ٱلْفَوْزُ ٱلْعَظِيمُ
b
3:133; 8:21; 33:72.
c
2:26.
a
3:133; 8:21; 33:72.
b
See 2:26.
a
3:133; 8:21; 33:72.
b
See 2:26.
وَمَن يَعْصِ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ وَيَتَعَدَّ حُدُودَهُۥ يُدْخِلْهُ نَارًا خَٰلِدًا فِيهَا وَلَهُۥ عَذَابٌ مُّهِينٌ
72:24.
جنت کے لئے بھی خُلُوْد کا لفظ آتا ہے یعنی یہ کہ جنتی ایک لمبے عرصہ تک اس میں رہیں گے اور دوزخ کے لئے خُلُوْد کا لفظ آتا ہے مگر قرآن کریم میں دوسری جگہوں پر یہ وضاحت ہے کہ جنتی جنت میں بلا وقفہ رہیں گے لیکن دوزخ کا عذاب ختم ہو جائے گا۔ اس لئے لمبے عرصہ کے معنے اس توضیح کو مدنظر رکھ کر کرنے چاہئیں۔
72:24.
72:24.
a
72:24.
1
جنت کے لئے بھی خُلُوْد کا لفظ آتا ہے یعنی یہ کہ جنتی ایک لمبے عرصہ تک اس میں رہیں گے اور دوزخ کے لئے خُلُوْد کا لفظ آتا ہے مگر قرآن کریم میں دوسری جگہوں پر یہ وضاحت ہے کہ جنتی جنت میں بلا وقفہ رہیں گے لیکن دوزخ کا عذاب ختم ہو جائے گا۔ اس لئے لمبے عرصہ کے معنے اس توضیح کو مدنظر رکھ کر کرنے چاہئیں۔
c
72:24.
c
72:24.
وَمَن لَّمْ يَسْتَطِعْ مِنكُمْ طَوْلًا أَن يَنكِحَ ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ فَمِن مَّا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُم مِّن فَتَيَٰتِكُمُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ أَعْلَمُ بِإِيمَٰنِكُم ۚ بَعْضُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْضٍ ۚ فَٱنكِحُوهُنَّ بِإِذْنِ أَهْلِهِنَّ وَءَاتُوهُنَّ أُجُورَهُنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ مُحْصَنَٰتٍ غَيْرَ مُسَٰفِحَٰتٍ وَلَا مُتَّخِذَٰتِ أَخْدَانٍ ۚ فَإِذَآ أُحْصِنَّ فَإِنْ أَتَيْنَ بِفَٰحِشَةٍ فَعَلَيْهِنَّ نِصْفُ مَا عَلَى ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتِ مِنَ ٱلْعَذَابِ ۚ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَنْ خَشِىَ ٱلْعَنَتَ مِنكُمْ ۚ وَأَن تَصْبِرُوا۟ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
4:16, 20; 24:20.
本节经文规定了三条重要原则: (a) 女奴应先正式结婚而后才发生夫妻关系。这在 2:222; 4:4; 及24:33各章中也明确说明。因此伊斯兰教根除了它诞生以前阿拉伯社会非常盛行的男女非法同居。(b) 如果女奴犯了通奸, 其处罚为自由妇女犯同样罪恶, 打100鞭子的一半, 这说明用石头砸死并非 (像被误解的那样) 是对通奸的惩罚, 因为用石头砸死是无法减半的。(c) 顺便提一下, 经文似乎指出, 在阿拉伯社会, 结婚的女奴比结婚的自由妇女享有较低的社会地位, 这也许因为女奴曾参加过摧毁伊斯兰教国家的战争。
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پاکباز ہوں تو مہر دو ورنہ نہ دو۔ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ایسی ہی لونڈیوں سے نکاح کرو جن کی پاک دامنی تم پر ثابت ہو۔ اور پھر ان کے مہر آزاد عورتوں کی طرح ادا کرو۔
یعنی لونڈیوں سے شادی کرنا صرف اضطراری حالت میں جائز ہے۔ کیونکہ وہ غیر مذہب اور غیر قوم سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں۔ بہتر یہی ہے کہ اپنی ہم مذہب اور ہم قوم آزاد عورت سے شادی کرو۔
4:16, 20; 24:20.
In Islam no stigma attaches to the status of a handmaid as such; but owing to her relationships and associations she may not prove such a perfect companion as a free believing woman.
This means that only such of them may be married as are chaste and virtuous. Once they are married their dowries must be paid just as in the case of free women.
The verse has laid down three vital principles: (a) Bondwomen should be properly married before conjugal relations are had with them. This is also clear from 2:222; 4:4; and 24:33. Thus Islam has cut at the root of concubinage which was so prevalent in Arab society before its advent. (b) If they commit adultery, bondwomen are to have half the punishment which is 100 stripes for free women for the same offence which shows that stoning to death is not the punishment for adultery, as mistakenly understood, because stoning to death cannot be halved. (c) Incidentally, the verse seems to indicate that a bondwoman taken in marriage had a lower social status in Arab society than a free woman taken in marriage, perhaps because of her having taken part in a war waged to destroy an Islamic State.
4:16, 20; 24:20.
Important Words:
طولا (to afford) is noun from طال i.e. he or it was or became long, tall or high. طول means, bounty or gift; ampleness of means; excellence; excess or increase; power or ability; wealth or competence. It may also mean, dowry or expenses of marriage (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
اخدان (secret paramours) is the plural of خدن. They say خادنه i.e. he was or became his friend or companion; or he was or became his secret or private friend. اخدان means friends or secret friends; amorous companions or associates; companions or associates affected with sensual appetency (Lane & Mufradat).
العنت (sins) is the noun-infinitive from عنت i.e. he fell into a difficulty; or he committed a sin or a crime or an act of disobedience; or he committed fornication or adultery. عنت therefore, means, severe difficulty or hardship; a state of perdition; a corrupt or evil state or conduct; a sin or crime, or an act of disobedience deserving punishment; a wrong action (intentional or unintentional); fornication or adultery (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:119, 2:221.
Commentary:
As God attaches great value to the faith of a Muslim, He does not like it to become impaired by his marrying disbelieving women. Hence the condition that even the bondwoman a Muslim may marry should be a believer.
The words, you are all one from another, are meant to raise believing bondwomen in the estimation of Muslims, who are hereby required not to despise them or treat them with contempt on account of their so-called lower status.
The words, half the punishment, mean 50 stripes, the punishment for (unmarried) free women being 100 stripes. See also 24:3. The word half shows that the verse refers to a punishment which can be halved, and not to stoning to death, which was inflicted on married free women. The punishment definitely prescribed in the Quran (24:3) for a fornicator and a fornicatress is only a hundred stripes, but as the Holy Prophet differentiated between married and unmarried persons, inflicting on the former the punishment of stoning to death, the aforesaid verse has been taken as only applying to unmarried persons.
The expression, this is for him among you who fears lest he should commit sin, shows that Muslims are enjoined to avoid, as far as possible, contracting conjugal relations with bond women taken prisoner from belligerent disbelievers. This is to be done only if, on the one hand, one is not able to marry a free woman and, on the other, by remaining unmarried, one fears to fall into sin. The Muslim Empire of Baghdad fell to pieces because the khalifahs took to contracting conjugal relations with bondwomen. The incompetent princes born of them ruined the State. In most cases, marital relations with bondwomen are calculated to have a demoralizing effect on both husbands and children.
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
324
本节经文规定了三条重要原则: (a) 女奴应先正式结婚而后才发生夫妻关系。这在 2:222; 4:4; 及24:33各章中也明确说明。因此伊斯兰教根除了它诞生以前阿拉伯社会非常盛行的男女非法同居。(b) 如果女奴犯了通奸, 其处罚为自由妇女犯同样罪恶, 打100鞭子的一半, 这说明用石头砸死并非 (像被误解的那样) 是对通奸的惩罚, 因为用石头砸死是无法减半的。(c) 顺便提一下, 经文似乎指出, 在阿拉伯社会, 结婚的女奴比结婚的自由妇女享有较低的社会地位, 这也许因为女奴曾参加过摧毁伊斯兰教国家的战争。
3
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پاکباز ہوں تو مہر دو ورنہ نہ دو۔ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ایسی ہی لونڈیوں سے نکاح کرو جن کی پاک دامنی تم پر ثابت ہو۔ اور پھر ان کے مہر آزاد عورتوں کی طرح ادا کرو۔
4
یعنی لونڈیوں سے شادی کرنا صرف اضطراری حالت میں جائز ہے۔ کیونکہ وہ غیر مذہب اور غیر قوم سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں۔ بہتر یہی ہے کہ اپنی ہم مذہب اور ہم قوم آزاد عورت سے شادی کرو۔
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
505
Important Words:
طولا (to afford) is noun from طال i.e. he or it was or became long, tall or high. طول means, bounty or gift; ampleness of means; excellence; excess or increase; power or ability; wealth or competence. It may also mean, dowry or expenses of marriage (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
اخدان (secret paramours) is the plural of خدن. They say خادنه i.e. he was or became his friend or companion; or he was or became his secret or private friend. اخدان means friends or secret friends; amorous companions or associates; companions or associates affected with sensual appetency (Lane & Mufradat).
العنت (sins) is the noun-infinitive from عنت i.e. he fell into a difficulty; or he committed a sin or a crime or an act of disobedience; or he committed fornication or adultery. عنت therefore, means, severe difficulty or hardship; a state of perdition; a corrupt or evil state or conduct; a sin or crime, or an act of disobedience deserving punishment; a wrong action (intentional or unintentional); fornication or adultery (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:119, 2:221.
Commentary:
As God attaches great value to the faith of a Muslim, He does not like it to become impaired by his marrying disbelieving women. Hence the condition that even the bondwoman a Muslim may marry should be a believer.
The words, you are all one from another, are meant to raise believing bondwomen in the estimation of Muslims, who are hereby required not to despise them or treat them with contempt on account of their so-called lower status.
The words, half the punishment, mean 50 stripes, the punishment for (unmarried) free women being 100 stripes. See also 24:3. The word half shows that the verse refers to a punishment which can be halved, and not to stoning to death, which was inflicted on married free women. The punishment definitely prescribed in the Quran (24:3) for a fornicator and a fornicatress is only a hundred stripes, but as the Holy Prophet differentiated between married and unmarried persons, inflicting on the former the punishment of stoning to death, the aforesaid verse has been taken as only applying to unmarried persons.
The expression, this is for him among you who fears lest he should commit sin, shows that Muslims are enjoined to avoid, as far as possible, contracting conjugal relations with bond women taken prisoner from belligerent disbelievers. This is to be done only if, on the one hand, one is not able to marry a free woman and, on the other, by remaining unmarried, one fears to fall into sin. The Muslim Empire of Baghdad fell to pieces because the khalifahs took to contracting conjugal relations with bondwomen. The incompetent princes born of them ruined the State. In most cases, marital relations with bondwomen are calculated to have a demoralizing effect on both husbands and children.
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
591
In Islam no stigma attaches to the status of a handmaid as such; but owing to her relationships and associations she may not prove such a perfect companion as a free believing woman.
591A
This means that only such of them may be married as are chaste and virtuous. Once they are married their dowries must be paid just as in the case of free women.
592
The verse has laid down three vital principles: (a) Bondwomen should be properly married before conjugal relations are had with them. This is also clear from 2:222; 4:4; and 24:33. Thus Islam has cut at the root of concubinage which was so prevalent in Arab society before its advent. (b) If they commit adultery, bondwomen are to have half the punishment which is 100 stripes for free women for the same offence which shows that stoning to death is not the punishment for adultery, as mistakenly understood, because stoning to death cannot be halved. (c) Incidentally, the verse seems to indicate that a bondwoman taken in marriage had a lower social status in Arab society than a free woman taken in marriage, perhaps because of her having taken part in a war waged to destroy an Islamic State.
وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ عُدْوَٰنًا وَظُلْمًا فَسَوْفَ نُصْلِيهِ نَارًا ۚ وَكَانَ ذَٰلِكَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ يَسِيرًا
وَٱلَّذِينَ يُنفِقُونَ أَمْوَٰلَهُمْ رِئَآءَ ٱلنَّاسِ وَلَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَلَا بِٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۗ وَمَن يَكُنِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ لَهُۥ قَرِينًا فَسَآءَ قَرِينًا
خبر عربی میں بہت جگہ حذف کر دی جاتی ہے اور اسے عبارت سے نکالا جاتا ہے۔ ایسا ہی یہاں ہوا ہے۔ ہم نے ترجمہ میں اسے ظاہر کر دیا ہے۔
2:265.
43:37, 39.
Important Words:
قرین (companion) is the verbal adjective from قرن. They say قرن شیئا بشییء i.e. he connected, coupled or conjoined a thing with another. قرین means, an associate; a comrade; a companion; also a husband (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
Some people spend their money while they have no faith in God or in the Last Day. They do it to win the applause of men and not the pleasure of God. So, instead of winning reward, they earn God’s displeasure. Sometimes, however, money is spent openly in the cause of God with the object of inducing others to do the same. This display of charity belongs to an altogether different category and is commendable.
d
2:265.
e
43:37, 39.
1
خبر عربی میں بہت جگہ حذف کر دی جاتی ہے اور اسے عبارت سے نکالا جاتا ہے۔ ایسا ہی یہاں ہوا ہے۔ ہم نے ترجمہ میں اسے ظاہر کر دیا ہے۔
a
2:265.
b
43:37, 39.
516
Important Words:
قرین (companion) is the verbal adjective from قرن. They say قرن شیئا بشییء i.e. he connected, coupled or conjoined a thing with another. قرین means, an associate; a comrade; a companion; also a husband (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
Some people spend their money while they have no faith in God or in the Last Day. They do it to win the applause of men and not the pleasure of God. So, instead of winning reward, they earn God’s displeasure. Sometimes, however, money is spent openly in the cause of God with the object of inducing others to do the same. This display of charity belongs to an altogether different category and is commendable.
b
2:265.
c
43:37, 39.
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَغْفِرُ أَن يُشْرَكَ بِهِۦ وَيَغْفِرُ مَا دُونَ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَن يَشَآءُ ۚ وَمَن يُشْرِكْ بِٱللَّهِ فَقَدِ ٱفْتَرَىٰٓ إِثْمًا عَظِيمًا
4:117.
4:117.
Shirk which is tantamount to treason in spiritual terminology extends to loving or trusting a thing or a being as one should love or trust God. The verse only relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of Shirk will not be forgiven.
4:117.
Important Words:
یشرك (associates partners) is derived from شرك . They say شرك فیه i.e. he shared or participated with him in it; he was or became his co-partner in it. أشرك بالله means, he attributed to God or associated with Him a partner or co-partner, whether in His person or attributes or dominion, etc. شرك means: (1) participation or co-partnership; (2) the attribution of a co-partner to, or associating a partner with, God, i.e. belief in the plurality of Gods (Lane & Aqrab). شرك in its wider sense is not confined to worshipping idols or looking upon certain beings or things as partners with God or possessing His attributes or sharing in His dominion, etc. It extends to loving a thing or a being as one should love God, or trusting in a thing or a being as one should trust in God, and so on. This latter kind of شرك is known as شرك خفی i.e. the hidden شرك being not easily discernible.
Commentary:
The reference in the verse is not only to idol-worship, but also to such idolatrous practices as are in vogue among common people, even among present-day Muslims, such as the adoration of saints and offering prayers and oblations to them. All such abominable practices are shirk in the sight of God. Butشرك خفی (hidden shirk), i.e. loving or trusting in a thing or being as one should love and trust in God, may be forgiven, if done in ignorance and through lack of proper care, provided one is a sincere believer in God and His Prophet and strives to do good works.
The expression, Allah will not forgive, does not mean that an idolatrous person can never repent or that his repentance cannot be accepted even in the present life. The expression relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of shirk will not be forgiven.
a
4:117.
a
4:117.
523
Important Words:
یشرك (associates partners) is derived from شرك . They say شرك فیه i.e. he shared or participated with him in it; he was or became his co-partner in it. أشرك بالله means, he attributed to God or associated with Him a partner or co-partner, whether in His person or attributes or dominion, etc. شرك means: (1) participation or co-partnership; (2) the attribution of a co-partner to, or associating a partner with, God, i.e. belief in the plurality of Gods (Lane & Aqrab). شرك in its wider sense is not confined to worshipping idols or looking upon certain beings or things as partners with God or possessing His attributes or sharing in His dominion, etc. It extends to loving a thing or a being as one should love God, or trusting in a thing or a being as one should trust in God, and so on. This latter kind of شرك is known as شرك خفی i.e. the hidden شرك being not easily discernible.
Commentary:
The reference in the verse is not only to idol-worship, but also to such idolatrous practices as are in vogue among common people, even among present-day Muslims, such as the adoration of saints and offering prayers and oblations to them. All such abominable practices are shirk in the sight of God. Butشرك خفی (hidden shirk), i.e. loving or trusting in a thing or being as one should love and trust in God, may be forgiven, if done in ignorance and through lack of proper care, provided one is a sincere believer in God and His Prophet and strives to do good works.
The expression, Allah will not forgive, does not mean that an idolatrous person can never repent or that his repentance cannot be accepted even in the present life. The expression relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of shirk will not be forgiven.
a
4:117.
615
Shirk which is tantamount to treason in spiritual terminology extends to loving or trusting a thing or a being as one should love or trust God. The verse only relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of Shirk will not be forgiven.
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ لَعَنَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ ۖ وَمَن يَلْعَنِ ٱللَّهُ فَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُۥ نَصِيرًا
2:160; 3:87, 88.
2:160; 3:87, 88.
2:160; 3:87-88.
Commentary:
God cursed the Jews in consequence of their perversity in declaring idolaters to be better guided than Muslims, although the former reject and abuse the Prophets of God.
The words, thou shalt not find for him a helper, contain a prophecy regarding the miserable condition to which the Jews were to be reduced. The whole world has witnessed how remarkably this prophecy has been fulfilled during the ages.
d
2:160; 3:87, 88.
a
2:160; 3:87-88.
527
Commentary:
God cursed the Jews in consequence of their perversity in declaring idolaters to be better guided than Muslims, although the former reject and abuse the Prophets of God.
The words, thou shalt not find for him a helper, contain a prophecy regarding the miserable condition to which the Jews were to be reduced. The whole world has witnessed how remarkably this prophecy has been fulfilled during the ages.
a
2:160; 3:87, 88.
وَمَن يُطِعِ ٱللَّهَ وَٱلرَّسُولَ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مَعَ ٱلَّذِينَ أَنْعَمَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِم مِّنَ ٱلنَّبِيِّۦنَ وَٱلصِّدِّيقِينَ وَٱلشُّهَدَآءِ وَٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ ۚ وَحَسُنَ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ رَفِيقًا
4:14; 8:25.
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
介系 مَعَ (ma‘) 表示两人或两人以上在同一地点或同一时间相伴在一起; 或者表示位置、等级或地位相同。如在9:40中所示, 这也含有帮助之意 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。此介系词曾在 «古兰经» 中好几次用过, 其意为 “فِی, fi”, 即“其中”的意思 (3:194和4:147)。
这节经文很重要, 因为它描述所有向穆斯林敞开了精神进展的大道。只有听从穆圣才能达到所有这四个精神等级--------先知、正人、殉教者, 及善人。这荣耀只有由穆圣独享。没有别的先知可以与他分享。另一节经文进一步证实了这个推论, 那节经文一般性地谈到了众先知说:“信仰安拉和他的使者的人们, 他们在他们的养主面前, 是正人和殉教者” (57:20)。把这两节经文联起来读, 意思就是, 其他先知的信从者只能达到正人、殉教者和善人的等级, 仅此而已, 而穆圣的信从者还能上升到先知的等级。بَحْرُ الْمُحِيْط (Baḥrul-Muḥīṭ) 第三卷, 287页摘引 (رَاغِبْ, Raghib) 的话说: “在这节经文中, 安拉把信从者分成四类, 并为他们指定了四级, 其中有低有高, 他并告诫那些真正的信从者不要落在任何等级的后面。” 这节经文还说, “先知品位有一般的和特殊的两种。特殊的先知品位即携持经律的先知品位, 现在不再能达到, 但一般先知品位还是可以达到的。”
قرآن کریم میں مَعَ کا لفظ ہے جس کے معنے ساتھ کے ہیں مگر مَعَ کے معنے مِنْ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے یہاں کیے ہیں ورنہ تَوَفَّنَا مَعَ الْاَبْرَارِ کی آیت کے یہ معنے کرنے پڑیں گے کہ جب نیک فوت ہوں تو ساتھ ہی ہم کو بھی مار دے۔ اور یہ بالبداہت غلط اور خلاف عقل دعا بن جاتی ہے۔
4:14; 8:25.
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
The particle ma‘ denotes concomitance of two or more persons in one place or at one time; or in position, rank or status. It also implies the sense of assistance as in 9:40 (Mufradat). The particle has been used at several places in the Qur’an in the sense of fi meaning "among" (3:194 & 4:147).
The verse is important as it describes all the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. All the four spiritual ranks—the Prophets; the Truthful; the Martyrs and the Righteous—can now be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says: And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses signify that, whereas the followers of other Prophets could only attain the rank of the Truthful, the Martyrs, and the Righteous and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can rise to the rank of a Prophet also. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the other
4:14; 8:25.
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
Important Words:
مع (among) is a common word of the Arabic language denoting concomitance. It means "with" or "among", etc. signifying the being together of two or more persons both literally and figuratively. The word مع thus denotes (1) concomitance of two or more persons in one place; or (2) concomitance of two or more persons at one time; or (3) concomitance of two or more persons in position, rank or status.
The word also implies the sense of assistance, as in the verse إن الله معنا i.e. Allah is with us, which means, God is our Helper (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it describes the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. The four spiritual ranks: (1) the Prophets (2) the Truthful (3) the Martyrs and (4) the Righteous can be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says, And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses purport to mean that whereas the followers of other Prophets could only rise to the rank of the Truthful and the Martyrs, and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can achieve even higher ranks; viz. they can rise to the rank of a Prophet also.
Some critics take exception to the particle مع rendered as "among" but generally taken to mean "with" and allege that a follower of the Holy Prophet will only be placed "with" the Prophets and not "among" them. Apart from what has been said under Important Words, if the particle مع be taken to denote that a follower of the Holy Prophet is merely joined to and placed with these four classes of men, without actually becoming one of them and without attaining their rank, it will follow from the construction of the verse that not only no person, by following in the footsteps of the Holy Prophet, can attain to the rank of a Prophet but also that he cannot even attain the rank of a Siddiq (Truthful) or a Shahid (Martyr) or a Salih (Righteous) but that he can only be joined to and placed with the people holding these ranks without himself attaining to their spiritual status, which is simply absurd. It is evident that the preposition مع rendered as "among" governs all the four nouns equally viz. the Salihin, the Shuhada’, the Siddiqin and the Nabiyyin, the four having been linked together in one chain. So what holds good in one case should hold good in the other cases as well. Hence, if according to this verse a person can attain the rank of a Salih (Righteous) by following the Holy Prophet of Islam, he can also attain the rank of a Prophet. If we deny the rank of a Prophet to the followers of the Holy Prophet, we will have to deny to them the rank of the Righteous also.
Besides, as shown under Important Words, it is wrong to say that the preposition مع always denotes merely being physically joined to or placed with a class of people physically without attaining to their position or rank. The word has been used at several places in the Quran in the sense of فی i.e. "among" or "from among" (see 3:194 and 4:147). In the latter verse, i.e. 4:147, God says that those of the hypocrites, who repent and amend, will be مع المؤمنین i.e. "among the believers". Now by no stretch of imagination can it be presumed that these people will only "be placed with the believers" and will not form part of them. The verse thus definitely proves that the word مع has been used here in the sense of فی or "among" and in no other sense. So is the case with 3:194. It is exactly in this sense that it has been used in the present verse. If, in the above-mentioned verses in which the word مع occurs, it is taken to give the sense of mere companionship, these verses would become meaningless. Certainly, it can give no comfort to a believer to be told that as a reward of his submission to God and the Holy Prophet, he would be merely made to sit in the company of the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous, without attaining the spiritual rank they attained. That the preposition مع is not always used in the sense of companionship finds a further illustration in the words which the Holy Prophet is reported to have uttered just before his death viz. ألحقنی بالرفیق الاعلی i.e. "O God, join me with the exalted companions" (meaning the class of the Prophets in Heaven). Now does this prayer of the Holy Prophet offered at the time of his death mean that he only wished to live in the company of these exalted personages and that he himself was not a Prophet of God?
Support for the above-mentioned wrong inference is sometimes sought from the words, this grace is from Allah, occurring in the succeeding verse. The word "grace", it is alleged, indicates that what these people will get will be purely through God’s grace and not as any reward or result of their own works and deeds. But the question: Did the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous attain their high spiritual stations independently of the "grace" of God? Did not the Holy Prophet himself, when asked whether he would get salvation by his deeds, say that he, too, would receive it through the "grace" of God? (Bukhari, ch. on Marda). Does this reply of the Prophet mean that he did not "deserve" salvation? In fact, the truth is that every blessing that one receives is a "grace" of God, in spite of the fact that it is the actions of man that draw this grace.
It may here be pointed out that the interpretation we have put on the verse under comment is not a new one. AbuHayyan, the well-known author of Bahrul-Muhit and Ar-Raghib, the great lexicographer, agree with this view. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the others, and He has exhorted true believers not to remain behind any of these stages." This explanation shows that both these commentators of the Quranheld that, as hinted in this verse, the rank of prophethood was attainable by following the Holy Prophet. Similarly, the author of the well-known commentary Ruhul-Ma‘ani in explanation of this verse, writes as follows: "Prophethood is of two kinds, general and special. The special prophethood, viz. the Law-bearing prophethood is now unattainable; but the general prophethood still continues." In fact, it is only the prophethood with a new Law that has now ceased, the Quran being the final Law of God, but prophethood without a new Law continues and is certainly attainable by the followers of the Holy Prophet who has himself said: "If my son Ibrahim had lived, he would have become a Prophet" (Majah, ch. on Jana’iz).
It may also be noted that even if the word مع is rendered as "with" and not as "among", it will not make much difference, for the word "with" very often gives the sense of being one of the party. When you are with a people, you are one of them. Even in English the word "with" is used in that sense. For fuller discussion of the subject of prophethood, see 33:41.
Finally, the word "companions" occurring at the end of the verse should not be construed to mean that mere companionship is meant here; for the expression has been used to hint at an additional significance, viz. that those who sincerely and truly follow God and His Messenger will not only rank among the Prophets, etc., but will also form a sort of company or brotherhood with them.
b
4:14; 8:25.
c
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
335
介系 مَعَ (ma‘) 表示两人或两人以上在同一地点或同一时间相伴在一起; 或者表示位置、等级或地位相同。如在9:40中所示, 这也含有帮助之意 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。此介系词曾在 «古兰经» 中好几次用过, 其意为 “فِی, fi”, 即“其中”的意思 (3:194和4:147)。
336
这节经文很重要, 因为它描述所有向穆斯林敞开了精神进展的大道。只有听从穆圣才能达到所有这四个精神等级--------先知、正人、殉教者, 及善人。这荣耀只有由穆圣独享。没有别的先知可以与他分享。另一节经文进一步证实了这个推论, 那节经文一般性地谈到了众先知说:“信仰安拉和他的使者的人们, 他们在他们的养主面前, 是正人和殉教者” (57:20)。把这两节经文联起来读, 意思就是, 其他先知的信从者只能达到正人、殉教者和善人的等级, 仅此而已, 而穆圣的信从者还能上升到先知的等级。بَحْرُ الْمُحِيْط (Baḥrul-Muḥīṭ) 第三卷, 287页摘引 (رَاغِبْ, Raghib) 的话说: “在这节经文中, 安拉把信从者分成四类, 并为他们指定了四级, 其中有低有高, 他并告诫那些真正的信从者不要落在任何等级的后面。” 这节经文还说, “先知品位有一般的和特殊的两种。特殊的先知品位即携持经律的先知品位, 现在不再能达到, 但一般先知品位还是可以达到的。”
1
قرآن کریم میں مَعَ کا لفظ ہے جس کے معنے ساتھ کے ہیں مگر مَعَ کے معنے مِنْ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے یہاں کیے ہیں ورنہ تَوَفَّنَا مَعَ الْاَبْرَارِ کی آیت کے یہ معنے کرنے پڑیں گے کہ جب نیک فوت ہوں تو ساتھ ہی ہم کو بھی مار دے۔ اور یہ بالبداہت غلط اور خلاف عقل دعا بن جاتی ہے۔
b
4:14; 8:25.
c
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
541
Important Words:
مع (among) is a common word of the Arabic language denoting concomitance. It means "with" or "among", etc. signifying the being together of two or more persons both literally and figuratively. The word مع thus denotes (1) concomitance of two or more persons in one place; or (2) concomitance of two or more persons at one time; or (3) concomitance of two or more persons in position, rank or status.
The word also implies the sense of assistance, as in the verse إن الله معنا i.e. Allah is with us, which means, God is our Helper (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it describes the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. The four spiritual ranks: (1) the Prophets (2) the Truthful (3) the Martyrs and (4) the Righteous can be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says, And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses purport to mean that whereas the followers of other Prophets could only rise to the rank of the Truthful and the Martyrs, and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can achieve even higher ranks; viz. they can rise to the rank of a Prophet also.
Some critics take exception to the particle مع rendered as "among" but generally taken to mean "with" and allege that a follower of the Holy Prophet will only be placed "with" the Prophets and not "among" them. Apart from what has been said under Important Words, if the particle مع be taken to denote that a follower of the Holy Prophet is merely joined to and placed with these four classes of men, without actually becoming one of them and without attaining their rank, it will follow from the construction of the verse that not only no person, by following in the footsteps of the Holy Prophet, can attain to the rank of a Prophet but also that he cannot even attain the rank of a Siddiq (Truthful) or a Shahid (Martyr) or a Salih (Righteous) but that he can only be joined to and placed with the people holding these ranks without himself attaining to their spiritual status, which is simply absurd. It is evident that the preposition مع rendered as "among" governs all the four nouns equally viz. the Salihin, the Shuhada’, the Siddiqin and the Nabiyyin, the four having been linked together in one chain. So what holds good in one case should hold good in the other cases as well. Hence, if according to this verse a person can attain the rank of a Salih (Righteous) by following the Holy Prophet of Islam, he can also attain the rank of a Prophet. If we deny the rank of a Prophet to the followers of the Holy Prophet, we will have to deny to them the rank of the Righteous also.
Besides, as shown under Important Words, it is wrong to say that the preposition مع always denotes merely being physically joined to or placed with a class of people physically without attaining to their position or rank. The word has been used at several places in the Quran in the sense of فی i.e. "among" or "from among" (see 3:194 and 4:147). In the latter verse, i.e. 4:147, God says that those of the hypocrites, who repent and amend, will be مع المؤمنین i.e. "among the believers". Now by no stretch of imagination can it be presumed that these people will only "be placed with the believers" and will not form part of them. The verse thus definitely proves that the word مع has been used here in the sense of فی or "among" and in no other sense. So is the case with 3:194. It is exactly in this sense that it has been used in the present verse. If, in the above-mentioned verses in which the word مع occurs, it is taken to give the sense of mere companionship, these verses would become meaningless. Certainly, it can give no comfort to a believer to be told that as a reward of his submission to God and the Holy Prophet, he would be merely made to sit in the company of the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous, without attaining the spiritual rank they attained. That the preposition مع is not always used in the sense of companionship finds a further illustration in the words which the Holy Prophet is reported to have uttered just before his death viz. ألحقنی بالرفیق الاعلی i.e. "O God, join me with the exalted companions" (meaning the class of the Prophets in Heaven). Now does this prayer of the Holy Prophet offered at the time of his death mean that he only wished to live in the company of these exalted personages and that he himself was not a Prophet of God?
Support for the above-mentioned wrong inference is sometimes sought from the words, this grace is from Allah, occurring in the succeeding verse. The word "grace", it is alleged, indicates that what these people will get will be purely through God’s grace and not as any reward or result of their own works and deeds. But the question: Did the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous attain their high spiritual stations independently of the "grace" of God? Did not the Holy Prophet himself, when asked whether he would get salvation by his deeds, say that he, too, would receive it through the "grace" of God? (Bukhari, ch. on Marda). Does this reply of the Prophet mean that he did not "deserve" salvation? In fact, the truth is that every blessing that one receives is a "grace" of God, in spite of the fact that it is the actions of man that draw this grace.
It may here be pointed out that the interpretation we have put on the verse under comment is not a new one. AbuHayyan, the well-known author of Bahrul-Muhit and Ar-Raghib, the great lexicographer, agree with this view. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the others, and He has exhorted true believers not to remain behind any of these stages." This explanation shows that both these commentators of the Quranheld that, as hinted in this verse, the rank of prophethood was attainable by following the Holy Prophet. Similarly, the author of the well-known commentary Ruhul-Ma‘ani in explanation of this verse, writes as follows: "Prophethood is of two kinds, general and special. The special prophethood, viz. the Law-bearing prophethood is now unattainable; but the general prophethood still continues." In fact, it is only the prophethood with a new Law that has now ceased, the Quran being the final Law of God, but prophethood without a new Law continues and is certainly attainable by the followers of the Holy Prophet who has himself said: "If my son Ibrahim had lived, he would have become a Prophet" (Majah, ch. on Jana’iz).
It may also be noted that even if the word مع is rendered as "with" and not as "among", it will not make much difference, for the word "with" very often gives the sense of being one of the party. When you are with a people, you are one of them. Even in English the word "with" is used in that sense. For fuller discussion of the subject of prophethood, see 33:41.
Finally, the word "companions" occurring at the end of the verse should not be construed to mean that mere companionship is meant here; for the expression has been used to hint at an additional significance, viz. that those who sincerely and truly follow God and His Messenger will not only rank among the Prophets, etc., but will also form a sort of company or brotherhood with them.
a
4:14; 8:25.
b
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
628
The particle ma‘ denotes concomitance of two or more persons in one place or at one time; or in position, rank or status. It also implies the sense of assistance as in 9:40 (Mufradat). The particle has been used at several places in the Qur’an in the sense of fi meaning "among" (3:194 & 4:147).
629
The verse is important as it describes all the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. All the four spiritual ranks—the Prophets; the Truthful; the Martyrs and the Righteous—can now be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says: And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses signify that, whereas the followers of other Prophets could only attain the rank of the Truthful, the Martyrs, and the Righteous and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can rise to the rank of a Prophet also. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the other
۞ فَلْيُقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ٱلَّذِينَ يَشْرُونَ ٱلْحَيَوٰةَ ٱلدُّنْيَا بِٱلْءَاخِرَةِ ۚ وَمَن يُقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ فَيُقْتَلْ أَوْ يَغْلِبْ فَسَوْفَ نُؤْتِيهِ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
a
9:111.
b
9:52.
a
9:111.
b
9:52.
a
9:111.
b
9:52.
مَّن يُطِعِ ٱلرَّسُولَ فَقَدْ أَطَاعَ ٱللَّهَ ۖ وَمَن تَوَلَّىٰ فَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَٰكَ عَلَيْهِمْ حَفِيظًا
Important Words:
حفیظ (keeper) is derived from حفظ. They say حفظ الشیء i.e. he kept the thing or preserved it or guarded it or protected it or took care of it; he prevented it from becoming lost. حافظ or حفیظ (the latter having more intensive meaning) means, keeper, preserver or guardian. When used about God, the attributive name besides giving the above meanings, also means, the Preserver of all things; One Who preserves the good and evil works of His creatures (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, Whoso obeys the Messenger obeys Allah indeed, further explain the meaning of the expression, Say, All is from Allah, occurring in 4:79 above. The verse purports to say that obedience to the Prophet is really obedience to God, and if Muslims get into trouble by obeying the Prophet, it is all subject to God’s own will and must not be attributed to the Prophet and such trouble can never result in evil; God’s dealings with the Prophet come under His special providence, and, therefore, he who finds fault with him really finds fault with God.
549
Important Words:
حفیظ (keeper) is derived from حفظ. They say حفظ الشیء i.e. he kept the thing or preserved it or guarded it or protected it or took care of it; he prevented it from becoming lost. حافظ or حفیظ (the latter having more intensive meaning) means, keeper, preserver or guardian. When used about God, the attributive name besides giving the above meanings, also means, the Preserver of all things; One Who preserves the good and evil works of His creatures (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, Whoso obeys the Messenger obeys Allah indeed, further explain the meaning of the expression, Say, All is from Allah, occurring in 4:79 above. The verse purports to say that obedience to the Prophet is really obedience to God, and if Muslims get into trouble by obeying the Prophet, it is all subject to God’s own will and must not be attributed to the Prophet and such trouble can never result in evil; God’s dealings with the Prophet come under His special providence, and, therefore, he who finds fault with him really finds fault with God.
مَّن يَشْفَعْ شَفَٰعَةً حَسَنَةً يَكُن لَّهُۥ نَصِيبٌ مِّنْهَا ۖ وَمَن يَشْفَعْ شَفَٰعَةً سَيِّئَةً يَكُن لَّهُۥ كِفْلٌ مِّنْهَا ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ مُّقِيتًا
这节经文意指说情的这一行动不能随随便便;因为那个代人说情的人应对自己的行动负责。如果他的说情是公正的, 他应得到适当的报酬; 否则, 他应为此而产生的不良后果负责。而且值得注意的是, 与 “公正说情” 有连系的字是 نَصِيْب (Nasib) (一份或规定的一份), 而与 “邪歹的说情” 有连系的字是 كِفْل (Kifl) (相同的一部分)。这就指明, 邪歹的说情所得的惩罚仅仅是与此相同的东西, 而公正的说情所得的善报却没有这样的限制, 而是像安拉规定的那么多, 即大十倍。
The verse signifies that the act of intercession or recommendation should not be treated lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will be held responsible for the evil consequences thereof. It is further noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession" the word used is Nasib (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word is Kifl (like portion). This is to point out that whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
Important Words:
For the significance of the words شفیع and شفاعة see under 2:49.
Commentary:
Read in the light of the context the words, Whoso makes a righteous intercession…may mean that a person who persuades others to fight in the cause of God shall have an ample reward, while he who dissuades them from fighting shall suffer punishment for doing so. The verse also signifies that people should not look upon the subject of intercession or recommendation lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of, or recommends, another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will share and be responsible for the evil consequence thereof.
Taking the word شفاعة in the sense of connection, the verse may also be rendered as, "whoso forms a good connection shall have a share thereof and whoso forms a bad connection shall have a like portion thereof," thus emphasizing the importance of forming a good connection whether with God or with His Prophets or with other people. Whereas a good connection may be the cause of rise and progress, a bad one may result in downfall and ruin. For a full discussion of the subject of شفاعة (intercession) see detailed note under 2:49.
It is noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession", the word used is نصیب (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word used is کفل (like portion). This is to point out that, whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
338
这节经文意指说情的这一行动不能随随便便;因为那个代人说情的人应对自己的行动负责。如果他的说情是公正的, 他应得到适当的报酬; 否则, 他应为此而产生的不良后果负责。而且值得注意的是, 与 “公正说情” 有连系的字是 نَصِيْب (Nasib) (一份或规定的一份), 而与 “邪歹的说情” 有连系的字是 كِفْل (Kifl) (相同的一部分)。这就指明, 邪歹的说情所得的惩罚仅仅是与此相同的东西, 而公正的说情所得的善报却没有这样的限制, 而是像安拉规定的那么多, 即大十倍。
554
Important Words:
For the significance of the words شفیع and شفاعة see under 2:49.
Commentary:
Read in the light of the context the words, Whoso makes a righteous intercession…may mean that a person who persuades others to fight in the cause of God shall have an ample reward, while he who dissuades them from fighting shall suffer punishment for doing so. The verse also signifies that people should not look upon the subject of intercession or recommendation lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of, or recommends, another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will share and be responsible for the evil consequence thereof.
Taking the word شفاعة in the sense of connection, the verse may also be rendered as, "whoso forms a good connection shall have a share thereof and whoso forms a bad connection shall have a like portion thereof," thus emphasizing the importance of forming a good connection whether with God or with His Prophets or with other people. Whereas a good connection may be the cause of rise and progress, a bad one may result in downfall and ruin. For a full discussion of the subject of شفاعة (intercession) see detailed note under 2:49.
It is noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession", the word used is نصیب (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word used is کفل (like portion). This is to point out that, whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
642
The verse signifies that the act of intercession or recommendation should not be treated lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will be held responsible for the evil consequences thereof. It is further noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession" the word used is Nasib (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word is Kifl (like portion). This is to point out that whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
۞ فَمَا لَكُمْ فِى ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ فِئَتَيْنِ وَٱللَّهُ أَرْكَسَهُم بِمَا كَسَبُوٓا۟ ۚ أَتُرِيدُونَ أَن تَهْدُوا۟ مَنْ أَضَلَّ ٱللَّهُ ۖ وَمَن يُضْلِلِ ٱللَّهُ فَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُۥ سَبِيلًا
یعنی ان کی عقل مار دی ہے۔
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the Hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, should be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and advocated strict measures. Muslims are here told that these Hypocrites are the enemies of God and that they should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
Important Words:
ارکسھم (has overthrown them). See 4:92.
Commentary:
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, were to be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and Muslims and advocated severity towards them. As this disagreement was likely to cause a split among Muslims and divide them into two parties, the Quran here expresses its disapproval of such a course. Muslims, it says, should beware of becoming divided among themselves due to the hypocrites. They should remember that a split in their own ranks was a much more serious affair than a danger from outside. The hypocrites were the enemies of God, and believers should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
1
یعنی ان کی عقل مار دی ہے۔
557
Important Words:
ارکسھم (has overthrown them). See 4:92.
Commentary:
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, were to be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and Muslims and advocated severity towards them. As this disagreement was likely to cause a split among Muslims and divide them into two parties, the Quran here expresses its disapproval of such a course. Muslims, it says, should beware of becoming divided among themselves due to the hypocrites. They should remember that a split in their own ranks was a much more serious affair than a danger from outside. The hypocrites were the enemies of God, and believers should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
644
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the Hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, should be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and advocated strict measures. Muslims are here told that these Hypocrites are the enemies of God and that they should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
وَمَا كَانَ لِمُؤْمِنٍ أَن يَقْتُلَ مُؤْمِنًا إِلَّا خَطَـًٔا ۚ وَمَن قَتَلَ مُؤْمِنًا خَطَـًٔا فَتَحْرِيرُ رَقَبَةٍ مُّؤْمِنَةٍ وَدِيَةٌ مُّسَلَّمَةٌ إِلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهِۦٓ إِلَّآ أَن يَصَّدَّقُوا۟ ۚ فَإِن كَانَ مِن قَوْمٍ عَدُوٍّ لَّكُمْ وَهُوَ مُؤْمِنٌ فَتَحْرِيرُ رَقَبَةٍ مُّؤْمِنَةٍ ۖ وَإِن كَانَ مِن قَوْمٍۭ بَيْنَكُمْ وَبَيْنَهُم مِّيثَٰقٌ فَدِيَةٌ مُّسَلَّمَةٌ إِلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهِۦ وَتَحْرِيرُ رَقَبَةٍ مُّؤْمِنَةٍ ۖ فَمَن لَّمْ يَجِدْ فَصِيَامُ شَهْرَيْنِ مُتَتَابِعَيْنِ تَوْبَةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
58:5.
As when actual or virtual state of war exists there is the likelihood that a Muslim may be killed by another Muslim by mistake, the present verse gives a timely warning to Muslims to be always on their guard against such an eventuality.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood-money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam. In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the Dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for the Muslims.
It is worthy of note that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in their favour. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of penalty has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed; the injunction to pay the penalty to his heirs having been put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of penalty was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and it is in order to bring home to them the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, that the injunction to pay the penalty has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
58:5.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contained injunctions which if misconstrued or misapplied, were likely to lead to a Muslim being killed by a Muslim, the present verse gives a timely warning against such an eventuality.
The words, It does not become a believer to kill a believer, have been used to make a touching appeal to believers to abstain from killing each other, since they are like brothers. It, in no case, behoves a brother to kill a brother. The words thus contain an important injunction which forms a fitting sequence to the one contained in the preceding verses concerning the hypocrites. The verse cautions a Muslim to be always on his guard lest in carelessness he should happen to kill a brother Muslim.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam which can in no case be allowed.
In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for Muslims.
It is worthy of note here that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in favour of the former. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of fine has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed, the injunction to pay the fine to his heirs being put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of fine was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and in order to bring home to Muslims the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, the injunction to pay the fine has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
a
9:5.
b
58:5.
a
58:5.
561
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contained injunctions which if misconstrued or misapplied, were likely to lead to a Muslim being killed by a Muslim, the present verse gives a timely warning against such an eventuality.
The words, It does not become a believer to kill a believer, have been used to make a touching appeal to believers to abstain from killing each other, since they are like brothers. It, in no case, behoves a brother to kill a brother. The words thus contain an important injunction which forms a fitting sequence to the one contained in the preceding verses concerning the hypocrites. The verse cautions a Muslim to be always on his guard lest in carelessness he should happen to kill a brother Muslim.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam which can in no case be allowed.
In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for Muslims.
It is worthy of note here that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in favour of the former. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of fine has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed, the injunction to pay the fine to his heirs being put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of fine was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and in order to bring home to Muslims the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, the injunction to pay the fine has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
a
58:5.
649
As when actual or virtual state of war exists there is the likelihood that a Muslim may be killed by another Muslim by mistake, the present verse gives a timely warning to Muslims to be always on their guard against such an eventuality.
650
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood-money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam. In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the Dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for the Muslims.
651
It is worthy of note that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in their favour. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of penalty has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed; the injunction to pay the penalty to his heirs having been put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of penalty was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and it is in order to bring home to them the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, that the injunction to pay the penalty has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
وَمَن يَقْتُلْ مُؤْمِنًا مُّتَعَمِّدًا فَجَزَآؤُهُۥ جَهَنَّمُ خَٰلِدًا فِيهَا وَغَضِبَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَلَعَنَهُۥ وَأَعَدَّ لَهُۥ عَذَابًا عَظِيمًا
25:69, 70.
25:69, 70.
25:69-70.
Commentary:
The solidarity of Islam and the tie of brotherhood among believers have been made absolutely inviolable. One who knowingly kills a fellow Muslim is like one who kills a son of his own father under the very eyes of the latter. The father would have nothing to do with such a man.
c
25:69, 70.
a
25:69-70.
562
Commentary:
The solidarity of Islam and the tie of brotherhood among believers have been made absolutely inviolable. One who knowingly kills a fellow Muslim is like one who kills a son of his own father under the very eyes of the latter. The father would have nothing to do with such a man.
b
25:69, 70.
۞ وَمَن يُهَاجِرْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ يَجِدْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُرَٰغَمًا كَثِيرًا وَسَعَةً ۚ وَمَن يَخْرُجْ مِنۢ بَيْتِهِۦ مُهَاجِرًا إِلَى ٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ ثُمَّ يُدْرِكْهُ ٱلْمَوْتُ فَقَدْ وَقَعَ أَجْرُهُۥ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
مُرَاغَمٌ: اَلْمَذْھَبُ وَ الْمَھْرَبُ راستہ اَلْحِصْنُ یعنی قلعہ۔ (اقرب) مُرَاغَمًا کَثِیْرًا اَیْ مَذْھَبًا یَذْھَبُ اِلَیْہِ یعنی مراغم کے معنے راستے کے ہیں۔ (مفردات)
Islam accepts no excuse from believers to stay in environments hostile to their Faith if they can afford to leave such localities.
Important Words:
مراغما (place of refuge) is derived from رغم. They say رغم أنفه meaning his nose clove to the dust, i.e. he became abased and humbled. رغمه means, he disliked it. ارغم اھله or راغم اھله means, he forsook or deserted his family against their wish. رغامmeans, earth or dust. مرغم or مراغم means, a road by travelling on which a man separates himself from his people against their wish or so as to displease them; a place to which one migrates; a place of refuge; a safe and fortified place (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse promises those sincere believers who are forced by circumstances to migrate from their homes in the cause of God abundant place of refuge and plentifulness. There is, therefore, no excuse for the people to stay at home surrounded by hostile disbelievers. But the motive must be good and the migration sincere.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "Whoso migrates from his home for the sake of God and His Messenger, his migration will be regarded as having been performed for the sake of God and His Messenger and will be rewarded as such. But whoso leaves his home for the sake of a worldly gain which he wishes to get or for a woman whom he wishes to marry, will be considered to have migrated for the sake of the object for which he migrated, and his migration will not be considered as having been performed in the cause of God" (Bukhari, ch. on Bad’ul Wahy).
2
مُرَاغَمٌ: اَلْمَذْھَبُ وَ الْمَھْرَبُ راستہ اَلْحِصْنُ یعنی قلعہ۔ (اقرب) مُرَاغَمًا کَثِیْرًا اَیْ مَذْھَبًا یَذْھَبُ اِلَیْہِ یعنی مراغم کے معنے راستے کے ہیں۔ (مفردات)
569
Important Words:
مراغما (place of refuge) is derived from رغم. They say رغم أنفه meaning his nose clove to the dust, i.e. he became abased and humbled. رغمه means, he disliked it. ارغم اھله or راغم اھله means, he forsook or deserted his family against their wish. رغامmeans, earth or dust. مرغم or مراغم means, a road by travelling on which a man separates himself from his people against their wish or so as to displease them; a place to which one migrates; a place of refuge; a safe and fortified place (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse promises those sincere believers who are forced by circumstances to migrate from their homes in the cause of God abundant place of refuge and plentifulness. There is, therefore, no excuse for the people to stay at home surrounded by hostile disbelievers. But the motive must be good and the migration sincere.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "Whoso migrates from his home for the sake of God and His Messenger, his migration will be regarded as having been performed for the sake of God and His Messenger and will be rewarded as such. But whoso leaves his home for the sake of a worldly gain which he wishes to get or for a woman whom he wishes to marry, will be considered to have migrated for the sake of the object for which he migrated, and his migration will not be considered as having been performed in the cause of God" (Bukhari, ch. on Bad’ul Wahy).
658
Islam accepts no excuse from believers to stay in environments hostile to their Faith if they can afford to leave such localities.
۞ لَّا خَيْرَ فِى كَثِيرٍ مِّن نَّجْوَىٰهُمْ إِلَّا مَنْ أَمَرَ بِصَدَقَةٍ أَوْ مَعْرُوفٍ أَوْ إِصْلَٰحٍۭ بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ ۚ وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ ٱبْتِغَآءَ مَرْضَاتِ ٱللَّهِ فَسَوْفَ نُؤْتِيهِ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
2:225.
نَجْوٰی‘ نَاجٰی‘ یُنَاجِیْ‘ مُنَاجَاۃً سے اسم ہے اور اس کے معنی ہیں سَارَّہٗ اس نے خفیہ طور پر مشورہ کیا۔ (اقرب) بعض کے نزدیک نجویٰ کے معنی صرف راز کی بات کے ہی نہیں بلکہ کوئی بات چیت جو مجلس میں جائے اور لوگ اس پربحث کریں اور تبادلہ خیالات کریں اس کو نجویٰ کہیں گے۔ (لسان)
2:225.
Najwa means, a secret talk between two or more persons or telling secrets to another person or holding secret conferences. The word is not restricted to secret conferences but applies to all sorts of conferences whether secret or otherwise in which specially invited people meet to discuss vital matters (Lisan & Muhit).
2:225.
Important Words:
نجوی (conference) is derived from نجا which means, he became safe; he escaped. نجا الجلد عن الذبیحة means, he removed the skin of the slaughtered animal, laying bare the interior. نجا الرجل means, he discoursed secrets with the man, or simply he discoursed with him. ناجا الرجل means, he talked with him in private, or he discoursed secretly with him. نجوی therefore means, a secret between two or more persons; a person or persons discoursing or talking secretly, or holding secret talks, or telling secrets to one another, or talking confidentially, or holding confidential conference; the act of talking or discussing secrets with one another or holding confidential conferences (Aqrab & Taj). According to some authorities, the word نجوی is not restricted to secret conferences, but signifies all conferences whether secret or otherwise in which some people meet at a place and discuss matters or talk together (Lisan). Zajjaj also endorses the same view, saying that secrecy is not essential to نجوی which is applied to all conferences, whether open or secret (Muhit). The word thus extends to those conferences which, though not secret, are attended only by regular members or specially invited persons.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it differentiates between good and bad conferences. The verse teaches that only three kinds of conferences or societies or meetings can be productive of good: Firstly, من امر بصدقة i.e. those that are founded or held with the object of promoting the welfare of the poor, the needy, etc. Secondly, من امر بمعروف i.e. those whose object is to promote the spread and propagation of, or investigation and research into, sciences, law, education, learning, the arts, etc. Thirdly, من امر باصلاح بین الناس i.e.those established for the purpose of settling disputes and removing causes of friction in domestic, social, national, or international matters. This would include associations for the purpose of conducting the political affairs of a nation or a country, for their object also is to promote peace among mankind. This teaching, if faithfully acted upon, should go a long way to establish peace and harmony in the world.
c
2:225.
2
نَجْوٰی‘ نَاجٰی‘ یُنَاجِیْ‘ مُنَاجَاۃً سے اسم ہے اور اس کے معنی ہیں سَارَّہٗ اس نے خفیہ طور پر مشورہ کیا۔ (اقرب) بعض کے نزدیک نجویٰ کے معنی صرف راز کی بات کے ہی نہیں بلکہ کوئی بات چیت جو مجلس میں جائے اور لوگ اس پربحث کریں اور تبادلہ خیالات کریں اس کو نجویٰ کہیں گے۔ (لسان)
a
2:225.
581
Important Words:
نجوی (conference) is derived from نجا which means, he became safe; he escaped. نجا الجلد عن الذبیحة means, he removed the skin of the slaughtered animal, laying bare the interior. نجا الرجل means, he discoursed secrets with the man, or simply he discoursed with him. ناجا الرجل means, he talked with him in private, or he discoursed secretly with him. نجوی therefore means, a secret between two or more persons; a person or persons discoursing or talking secretly, or holding secret talks, or telling secrets to one another, or talking confidentially, or holding confidential conference; the act of talking or discussing secrets with one another or holding confidential conferences (Aqrab & Taj). According to some authorities, the word نجوی is not restricted to secret conferences, but signifies all conferences whether secret or otherwise in which some people meet at a place and discuss matters or talk together (Lisan). Zajjaj also endorses the same view, saying that secrecy is not essential to نجوی which is applied to all conferences, whether open or secret (Muhit). The word thus extends to those conferences which, though not secret, are attended only by regular members or specially invited persons.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it differentiates between good and bad conferences. The verse teaches that only three kinds of conferences or societies or meetings can be productive of good: Firstly, من امر بصدقة i.e. those that are founded or held with the object of promoting the welfare of the poor, the needy, etc. Secondly, من امر بمعروف i.e. those whose object is to promote the spread and propagation of, or investigation and research into, sciences, law, education, learning, the arts, etc. Thirdly, من امر باصلاح بین الناس i.e.those established for the purpose of settling disputes and removing causes of friction in domestic, social, national, or international matters. This would include associations for the purpose of conducting the political affairs of a nation or a country, for their object also is to promote peace among mankind. This teaching, if faithfully acted upon, should go a long way to establish peace and harmony in the world.
c
2:225.
670
Najwa means, a secret talk between two or more persons or telling secrets to another person or holding secret conferences. The word is not restricted to secret conferences but applies to all sorts of conferences whether secret or otherwise in which specially invited people meet to discuss vital matters (Lisan & Muhit).
وَمَن يُشَاقِقِ ٱلرَّسُولَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا تَبَيَّنَ لَهُ ٱلْهُدَىٰ وَيَتَّبِعْ غَيْرَ سَبِيلِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ نُوَلِّهِۦ مَا تَوَلَّىٰ وَنُصْلِهِۦ جَهَنَّمَ ۖ وَسَآءَتْ مَصِيرًا
7:4.
یعنی وہ رسولؐ اور اس کے صحابہؓ کو تباہ کرنا چاہتا ہے۔ ہم وہی تباہی اس کی قسمت میں لکھ دیں گے۔
7:4.
7:4.
Commentary:
The verse means that people who oppose the Prophet openly or secretly and seek for themselves a way other than that of believers, in spite of the fact that the divine guidance has become clear to them, will be deprived of the means of guidance, and God will let them follow the wrong course they are pursuing, i.e. they will increase in their hypocrisy and disbelief.
d
7:4.
3
یعنی وہ رسولؐ اور اس کے صحابہؓ کو تباہ کرنا چاہتا ہے۔ ہم وہی تباہی اس کی قسمت میں لکھ دیں گے۔
a
7:4.
582
Commentary:
The verse means that people who oppose the Prophet openly or secretly and seek for themselves a way other than that of believers, in spite of the fact that the divine guidance has become clear to them, will be deprived of the means of guidance, and God will let them follow the wrong course they are pursuing, i.e. they will increase in their hypocrisy and disbelief.
a
7:4.
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَغْفِرُ أَن يُشْرَكَ بِهِۦ وَيَغْفِرُ مَا دُونَ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَن يَشَآءُ ۚ وَمَن يُشْرِكْ بِٱللَّهِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلَٰلًۢا بَعِيدًا
a
4:49.
b
4:137.
b
4:49.
c
4:137.
583
Commentary:
See note on 4:49.
b
4:49.
c
4:137.
وَلَأُضِلَّنَّهُمْ وَلَأُمَنِّيَنَّهُمْ وَلَءَامُرَنَّهُمْ فَلَيُبَتِّكُنَّ ءَاذَانَ ٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ وَلَءَامُرَنَّهُمْ فَلَيُغَيِّرُنَّ خَلْقَ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَمَن يَتَّخِذِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنَ وَلِيًّا مِّن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ فَقَدْ خَسِرَ خُسْرَانًا مُّبِينًا
اس سے مراد یہ ہے کہ انسانی فطرت کو جو توحید کی طرف توجہ دلاتی ہے بدل کر وہ شرک کا رواج قائم کرنا چاہتے ہیں۔
As a mark of their devotion to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day in some countries
The 'alteration of Allah’s creation' is done by (1) deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; and (4) by turning to evil use that which Allah has created for good use.
Important Words:
فلیبتکن (will cut) is derived from بتك. They say بتکه i.e. he cut it or severed it, or slit it, or cut it off entirely, or plucked it out (Lane).
Commentary:
The opening part of the verse is a continuation of the speech of Satan begun in the last verse, and the latter part embodies a pronouncement of the judgement of God.
As a mark of their dedication to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day among some ignorant people in India and elsewhere.
The "alteration of God’s creation" can be, and is, generally done in four ways: (1) by deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; (4) by turning to an evil use that which God has created for a good purpose. For instance, God has endowed man with many faculties by making a right use of which he can make great progress in all departments of life, but not unoften he seeks to alter God’s creation by making an evil use of them and as a result thereof "suffers a manifest loss".
347
作为他们对虚假的神信仰的一种标志, 阿拉伯人过去常常刻作供奉用的牲畜的耳朵以示与其他牲畜的区别。这种愚蠢的做法, 至今尚见于一些国家。
348
“改变安拉的创造” 包括以下几种做法: (1) 蔑视安拉的创造; (2) 窜改和腐化安拉的宗教; (3) 使一个初生婴儿的身体变形; 以及 (4) 把安拉为行善而创造的东西改用来做邪恶的事情。
3
اس سے مراد یہ ہے کہ انسانی فطرت کو جو توحید کی طرف توجہ دلاتی ہے بدل کر وہ شرک کا رواج قائم کرنا چاہتے ہیں۔
586
Important Words:
فلیبتکن (will cut) is derived from بتك. They say بتکه i.e. he cut it or severed it, or slit it, or cut it off entirely, or plucked it out (Lane).
Commentary:
The opening part of the verse is a continuation of the speech of Satan begun in the last verse, and the latter part embodies a pronouncement of the judgement of God.
As a mark of their dedication to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day among some ignorant people in India and elsewhere.
The "alteration of God’s creation" can be, and is, generally done in four ways: (1) by deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; (4) by turning to an evil use that which God has created for a good purpose. For instance, God has endowed man with many faculties by making a right use of which he can make great progress in all departments of life, but not unoften he seeks to alter God’s creation by making an evil use of them and as a result thereof "suffers a manifest loss".
672
As a mark of their devotion to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day in some countries
673
The 'alteration of Allah’s creation' is done by (1) deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; and (4) by turning to evil use that which Allah has created for good use.
وَمَن يَعْمَلْ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ مِن ذَكَرٍ أَوْ أُنثَىٰ وَهُوَ مُؤْمِنٌ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَدْخُلُونَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ وَلَا يُظْلَمُونَ نَقِيرًا
40:41
40:41
The verse places men and women on the same level so far as their works and rewards are concerned. Both are equally entitled to good reward if they do good works.
40:41.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it clearly places men and women on the same level so far as works and their rewards are concerned. Both alike are servants of the Lord and both are equally entitled to a good reward, if they do good works. It is indeed strange that in spite of such explicit teaching some Christian missionaries should have the hardihood to bring against Islam the charge that according to it women, unlike men, are devoid of souls.
It should also be noted that true belief is a necessary condition for salvation, as the words, and is a believer, clearly indicate.
c
40:41
c
40:41.
590
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it clearly places men and women on the same level so far as works and their rewards are concerned. Both alike are servants of the Lord and both are equally entitled to a good reward, if they do good works. It is indeed strange that in spite of such explicit teaching some Christian missionaries should have the hardihood to bring against Islam the charge that according to it women, unlike men, are devoid of souls.
It should also be noted that true belief is a necessary condition for salvation, as the words, and is a believer, clearly indicate.
a
40:41
674
The verse places men and women on the same level so far as their works and rewards are concerned. Both are equally entitled to good reward if they do good works.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ ءَامِنُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ وَٱلْكِتَٰبِ ٱلَّذِى نَزَّلَ عَلَىٰ رَسُولِهِۦ وَٱلْكِتَٰبِ ٱلَّذِىٓ أَنزَلَ مِن قَبْلُ ۚ وَمَن يَكْفُرْ بِٱللَّهِ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتِهِۦ وَكُتُبِهِۦ وَرُسُلِهِۦ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلَٰلًۢا بَعِيدًا
2:5, 137; 4:163: 5:60.
4:151.
4:117.
O ye who profess to be believers show by your deeds and actions that your faith is genuine and firmly founded.
2:5, 137; 4:163; 5:60.
4:151.
4:117.
Commentary:
In the clause: O ye who believe, believe in Allah and His Messenger… the first-mentioned belief refers to lip-profession and the second to true and genuine belief which really matters. The words thus show that sometimes expressions like "O ye who believe" or "believers" may be used for those who profess to be believers in Islam but do not live up to its teachings by carrying out faithfully its precepts into practice. Their assertion is a mere lip-profession that carries no weight.
a
2:5, 137; 4:163: 5:60.
b
4:151.
c
4:117.
a
2:5, 137; 4:163; 5:60.
b
4:151.
c
4:117.
601
Commentary:
In the clause: O ye who believe, believe in Allah and His Messenger… the first-mentioned belief refers to lip-profession and the second to true and genuine belief which really matters. The words thus show that sometimes expressions like "O ye who believe" or "believers" may be used for those who profess to be believers in Islam but do not live up to its teachings by carrying out faithfully its precepts into practice. Their assertion is a mere lip-profession that carries no weight.
a
2:5, 137; 4:163: 5:60.
b
4:151.
c
4:117.
683
O ye who profess to be believers show by your deeds and actions that your faith is genuine and firmly founded.
مُّذَبْذَبِينَ بَيْنَ ذَٰلِكَ لَآ إِلَىٰ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ وَلَآ إِلَىٰ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ ۚ وَمَن يُضْلِلِ ٱللَّهُ فَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُۥ سَبِيلًا
آیت میں اَضَلَّ کا لفظ ہے۔ جس کے ایک معنے ہلاک کرنے کے بھی ہیں۔ (اقرب)
The expression means, "between belief and disbelief" or "between believers and disbelievers".
Important Words:
مذبذبین (wavering) which is the plural of مذبذب is derived from ذب. They say ذب عنه meaning, he repelled from him, i.e. he defended him. ذبذب الشیء means, he made the thing move to and fro; he put it in a state of motion, commotion or agitation. ذبذبه means, he or it made him confounded or perplexed so that he could not know his right course; he left him wavering, vacillating, going to and fro. تذبذب الشیء means, the thing dangled or moved to and fro; or was in a state of motion or commotion. مذبذب means, driven away or repelled from this side and that; wavering or vacillating between two persons or parties or things, not attaching oneself steadily to either (Lane & Aqrab). Another قراءة (reading) of مذبذین is متذبذبین and yet another مذبذبین (mudhabdhibin) with different vowel point at the second ذ (Kashshaf).
The expression بین ذالك (between this and that) means, between belief and disbelief or between believers and disbelievers.
Commentary:
The verse very aptly describes the condition of the hypocrites. To quote a well-known Indian maxim, they have their feet in two separate boats. A hypocrite thinks himself to be acting wisely (2:14) but his action is really the height of folly.
2
آیت میں اَضَلَّ کا لفظ ہے۔ جس کے ایک معنے ہلاک کرنے کے بھی ہیں۔ (اقرب)
607
Important Words:
مذبذبین (wavering) which is the plural of مذبذب is derived from ذب. They say ذب عنه meaning, he repelled from him, i.e. he defended him. ذبذب الشیء means, he made the thing move to and fro; he put it in a state of motion, commotion or agitation. ذبذبه means, he or it made him confounded or perplexed so that he could not know his right course; he left him wavering, vacillating, going to and fro. تذبذب الشیء means, the thing dangled or moved to and fro; or was in a state of motion or commotion. مذبذب means, driven away or repelled from this side and that; wavering or vacillating between two persons or parties or things, not attaching oneself steadily to either (Lane & Aqrab). Another قراءة (reading) of مذبذین is متذبذبین and yet another مذبذبین (mudhabdhibin) with different vowel point at the second ذ (Kashshaf).
The expression بین ذالك (between this and that) means, between belief and disbelief or between believers and disbelievers.
Commentary:
The verse very aptly describes the condition of the hypocrites. To quote a well-known Indian maxim, they have their feet in two separate boats. A hypocrite thinks himself to be acting wisely (2:14) but his action is really the height of folly.
688
The expression means, "between belief and disbelief" or "between believers and disbelievers".
لَّن يَسْتَنكِفَ ٱلْمَسِيحُ أَن يَكُونَ عَبْدًا لِّلَّهِ وَلَا ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ ٱلْمُقَرَّبُونَ ۚ وَمَن يَسْتَنكِفْ عَنْ عِبَادَتِهِۦ وَيَسْتَكْبِرْ فَسَيَحْشُرُهُمْ إِلَيْهِ جَمِيعًا
5:117, 118.
5:117, 118.
5:117, 118.
Important Words:
یستنکف (will disdain) is derived from استنکف which is derived from نکف. They say نکف عنه i.e. he disdained it and turned away from it. استنکف الرجل means, the man was or became proud and vain, disdaining others. استنکف من کذا means, he kept back or turned away from it, or he disdained it by way of pride, vanity or haughtiness (Aqrab).
f
5:117, 118.
a
5:117, 118.
636
Important Words:
یستنکف (will disdain) is derived from استنکف which is derived from نکف. They say نکف عنه i.e. he disdained it and turned away from it. استنکف الرجل means, the man was or became proud and vain, disdaining others. استنکف من کذا means, he kept back or turned away from it, or he disdained it by way of pride, vanity or haughtiness (Aqrab).
d
5:117, 118.